Yamaha RX-V757 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V757

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: Manual de usuario

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V757

Printed in Malaysia WE59930

RX-V757

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

01EN_RX-V757_U-cv_version1.fm Page 1 Friday, December 24, 2004 4:29 PM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use

a damp cloth for cleaning.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven

surfaces may cause the product and cart

combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,

dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,

20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of

this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this

unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may

fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to

liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,

do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall

and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user

and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If

the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord and outdoor antenna from the wall outlet

during an electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models

only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

Asia model ..................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model

........................... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment

by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through

loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories.................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel................................................................. 4

Remote control...........................................................6

Using the remote control ........................................... 7

Front panel display ....................................................8

Rear panel................................................................10

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11

Speaker placement................................................... 11

Speaker connections ................................................ 12

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15

Before connecting components................................15

Connecting video components................................. 16

Connecting audio components................................. 19

Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 21

Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22

Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 23

Turning on the power............................................... 23

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 24

Introduction.............................................................. 24

Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 24

Starting the setup ..................................................... 25

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30

Basic operations....................................................... 30

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32

Selecting input modes.............................................. 37

FM/AM TUNING................................................. 39

Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 39

Presetting stations.................................................... 40

Selecting preset stations........................................... 42

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING .................. 45

What is XM Satellite Radio?...................................45

XM Satellite Radio connections..............................45

XM Satellite Radio functions .................................. 46

Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................47

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations.......................48

XM Satellite Radio search modes............................ 49

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............52

RECORDING....................................................... 55

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................56

For movie/video sources.......................................... 56

For music sources.................................................... 58

ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................59

Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 59

Using the sleep timer............................................... 59

Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 60

SET MENU............................................................61

Using SET MENU................................................... 63

1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 64

2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 69

3 OPTION MENU................................................... 71

ADVANCED SETUP MENU...............................73

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................75

Control area ............................................................. 75

Setting remote control codes ................................... 76

Controlling other components ................................. 78

Programming codes from other remote controls..... 79

Changing source names in the display window....... 80

Clearing function sets.............................................. 81

Clearing individual functions .................................. 82

ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA

AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) ..................83

Zone 2 connections.................................................. 83

Remote controlling Zone 2...................................... 84

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......86

What is a sound field ............................................... 86

Changing parameter settings ................................... 86

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................88

TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................93

RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........98

GLOSSARY...........................................................99

Audio formats.......................................................... 99

Sound field programs............................................. 100

Audio information ................................................. 100

Video signal information....................................... 101

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................102

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

FEATURES

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω)

Front: 100 W + 100 W

Center: 100 W

Surround: 100 W + 100 W

Surround back: 100 W + 100 W

Sound field features

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,

DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/

Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

XM Satellite Radio

◆ XM Satellite Radio programming (using the “XM

connect and Play digital antenna accessory”, sold

separately)

Other features

◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer for automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ A SET MENU that provides you with items for

optimizing this unit for your audio/video system

◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input

◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and

PCM sources

◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this

unit

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-video

→ Component video) capability for monitor out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and

“learning” capability

◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada,

Australia and Europe models only)

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM

Satellite Radio Inc.

FEATURES

GETTING STARTED

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings

(+ / –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases,

the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDI O

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

Remote control

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China

and General models)

AM loop antenna

Indoor FM antenna

(Europe, Australia and

Korea models)

Optimizer microphone

Installing batteries in the remote

control

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the remote control code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.

2 OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied

microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see

page 24).

3 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

4 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT, CATEGORY

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

the unit is in tuner mode.

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is

not in tuner mode.

6 PRESET/TUNING/ CH* l / h, LEVEL –/+

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is

displayed next to the band indication in the front panel

display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning

frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed.

Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using

A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode.

7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO),

DISPLAY*

Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO

indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off).

9 VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source.

0 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

MAIN

ZONE ON/OFF

ZONE 2

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

31452609

KHGEBACDF I

(U.S.A. model)

(U.S.A., Canada,

Australia and Europe

models only)

Note

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.

All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down

to the left and right headphone channels.

B SPEAKERS A/B

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT), SEARCH MODE

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(LEVEL) between selecting preset station numbers and

tuning.

D STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

E FM/AM, XM

Switches the reception band when the unit is in tuner

mode.

F PROGRAM

Use to select sound field programs or adjust the bass/treble

balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).

G TONE CONTROL

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and

right, center, presence and subwoofer channels (see

page 31).

H INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37).

I INPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

J MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

K PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 35).

■ U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe

models only

L ZONE ON/OFF buttons

MAIN

Switches this unit’s operation to control the component in

the main room (see page 84).

ZONE 2

Switches this unit’s operation to control the component in

the second room (Zone 2) (see page 84).

Available only when the unit is in the XM Satellite Radio

mode (see page 45).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on

page 75.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

3 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

4 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

5 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

6 Display window

Shows the name of the selected source component that

you can control.

7 LEVEL, BAND

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

level.

Switches the reception band when the unit is in tuner

mode.

8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i /ENTER

Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or

SET MENU items.

Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) when

the unit is in tuner mode.

Press u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8)

when the unit is in tuner mode.

9 RETURN, MEMORY*

Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the

SET MENU parameters.

0 Sound field program/numeric buttons

Use to select sound field programs.

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the

unit is in tuner mode.

Use SELECT to playback 2-channel sources in multiple

channel format (see page 34).

Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1-channel

playback of multi-channel software (see page 33).

Use PURE DIRECT to turn on or off PURE DIRECT

mode (see page 35).

A SPEAKERS A/B

Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to

the A and/or B terminal on the rear panel each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

B RE-NAME

Use to change the input source name in the display

window (see page 80).

Remote control

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

C CLEAR

Use to clear functions acquired when using the learn and

rename features, or setting remote control codes (see

page 81).

D LEARN

Use to set up manufacturer codes or program functions

from other remote controls (see pages 76 and 79).

E SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

F INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37).

G MULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder (etc.).

H SELECT k/n

Selects another component that you can control

independently of the input component selected with the

input selector buttons.

I AMP

Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to

control the main unit.

J VOL +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

K MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

L SET MENU, SRCH MODE

Activates the SET MENU function.

M ON SCREEN

Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)

this unit sends to your video monitor.

N STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

O NIGHT, ENT.

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 35).

Available only when the unit is in the XM Satellite Radio

mode (see page 45).

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperature, such as near a heater or

stove

– extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Using the remote control

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

30 30

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

CLEAR

LEARN

POWER SLEEP

STANDBY

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

POWER

AMP

REC

DISC SKIP

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

TITLE

BAND

TV INPUT

SRCH MODE

TV VOL

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

A-E/CAT.

MUTE

TV MUTE

ENTER

PRESET PRESET

RETURN

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

EFFECTMEMORY

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN MOVIE

STANDARD

SELECT

EXTD SUR.

PURE DIRECT

ENT.

+10

NIGHT

SPEAKERS

CHP/INDEX

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 Decoder indicators

When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective

indicator lights up.

2 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 36).

3 SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 31).

4 Input source indicators

A cursor lights to show the current input source.

5 Sound field indicators

Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

6 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

7 YPAO indicator

Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the

auto setup speaker settings are used without any

modifications.

8 AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in automatic tuning mode.

9 TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

0 STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

A MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show that a station can be stored.

B MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

C VOLUME level indication

Indicates the current volume level.

D PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

E STANDARD

Lights up when a decoder is selected (see page 34).

F NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode.

G SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are

selected.

H Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

I HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program.

J Multi-information display

Shows the current sound field program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

Front panel display

PHONOCDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA

NIGHT

ZONE2STANDARD

HD AUTO

YPAO

HOLD

RT CT

EON

PTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

HiFi DSP

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

123456789 A B C0

IJ M

KNLED

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia,

U.K. and Europe models

only)

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field

Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

K SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

L 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

M LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

N Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

■ U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe

model only

O ZONE 2 indicator

Lights up when Zone 2 power is on.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

See page 19 for details.

2 Audio component jacks

See page 19 for connection information.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 16 and 18 for connection information.

4 Antenna terminals

(except U.K. model)

See page 21 for connection information.

5 PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe

models)

PRESENCE speaker terminals

(other models)

See page 13 for connection information.

6 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models

only)

See page 83 for details.

7 XM jack

See page 45 for connection information.

8 CONTROL OUT jack

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe

models only)

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.

9 AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see

page 22).

0 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details.

A MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 17 for connection information.

B ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models

only)

These jacks output analog signals only. See page 83 for

details.

TUNER INPUT jacks

(U.K. model only)

C PRE OUT jacks

See page 20 for connection information.

D Speaker terminals

See page 13 for connection information.

■ General models only

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

See page 22 for details.

Rear panel

GND

AUDIO AUDIO

DIGITAL

INPUT

DVD

COAXIAL

DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

BACK

SURROUND

FRONT

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

/CD-R

PHONO

DVD

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DTV

/CBL

DVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR PB Y

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

ANTGND

TUNER

DTV/

CBL

VCR 1

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

OUT

CENTER

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE 2

OUTPUT

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

FRONT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER SINGLE

PRE OUT

SURROUND

BACK

PRESENCE/

ZONE 2

OUT

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

+12V

15mA MAX.

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

CENTER SURROUND BACK

OPTICAL

12 3 48965

0A B C D

(U.S.A. model)

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP

and multi-channel audio sources.

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union).

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as the front speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

Presence speakers (PR and PL)

Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA

DSP (see page 56). These effects include sounds that

filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the

screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place

these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m

(1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly

inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

SPEAKER SETUP

Speaker placement

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

30 cm (12 in) or more

1.8 m (6 ft)

SPEAKER SETUP

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

• If you will use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to

set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 4

ohms before using (see page 23).

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the

power of this unit is off.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do

not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This

could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3 Unscrew the knob.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or

PRESENCE speaker terminals

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure the wire.

■ Banana plug connections

(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and

PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one

banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not

attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.

Speaker connections

CAUTION

10 mm (3/8")

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K. and

Europe models)

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

FRONT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER SINGLE

PRE OUT

SURROUND

BACK

PRESENCE/

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

CENTER SURROUND BACK

231

6 7 10

Subwoofer

system

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back

speakers

LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

(U.S.A. model)

LeftRight

Presence speakers

You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.

• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only

operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on.

• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields

are selected.

SPEAKER SETUP

■ FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems (6, 7) to these

terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it

to the FRONT A or B terminals.

■ CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker (8) to these terminals.

■ SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.

■ SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (1), such as

the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer

System, to this jack.

■ SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back speakers (9, 10) to these terminals.

If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it

to the left (L) terminals.

■ PRESENCE terminals

Connect presence speakers (2, 3) to these terminals.

If you are using either the U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. or

Europe model, you can also use these speakers as Zone 2

speakers (see page 72).

Speaker layout

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains

power until all connections between components are

complete.

■ Cable indications

■ Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.

Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the

left jacks.

■ Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the

analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the

digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.

Dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect

the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are

not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in

place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit

are automatically converted for output through the

VIDEO jacks. When VIDEO CONV. is set to ON (see

page 71), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be

output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks

can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks.

VIDEO jacks

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jacks

For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (P

B, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO

jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

Note

CAUTION

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

component video cables

Note

VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit

Only when VIDEO CONV. is set to ON

(see page 71).

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for DVD playback

Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit if VIDEO CONV. (see

page 71) is set to OFF. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video

source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections. (Even when V CONV. is set to OFF, S-video signals input from your

video source component are automatically converted to composite signals in this unit.)

Connecting video components

Note

VIDEO

AUDIO

DIGITAL

INPUT

DVD

COAXIAL

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR PB Y

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

R PB Y

LRC

DVD player

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. model)

Optical out

Video out

Audio out

Video in

Coaxial out

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND, left and

right SURROUND BACK and SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external

decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output.

Notes

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUT

LRLR

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

BACK

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUT

LR LRLR

Multi-format player/

External decoder

For 6-channel input

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Surround

back out

For 8-channel input

(U.S.A. model)

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for other video components

• Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit if VIDEO CONV. (see

page 71) is set to OFF. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video

source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections.

• Converted video signals are only output to MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording, you must make the same type of video

connections (i.e., S-video) between each component.

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a

game console or video camera, to this unit.

Notes

AUDIO

DIGITAL

INPUT

COAXIAL

DTV/CBL

VIDEO

DTV/

CBL

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR PB Y

DTV/

CBL

VCR 1

OUT

LR LR

MONITOR

OUT

R PB Y

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out

Video out

Video inAudio in

(U.S.A. model)

Video

monitor

Video in

or or

VIDEOS VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

Game

console or

video

camera

Video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

Optical out

S-video out

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connections for audio components

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. However you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some record players.

Connecting audio components

GND

AUDIO AUDIO

DIGITAL

INPUT

COAXIAL

MD/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

MD/

CD-R

PHONO

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(U.S.A. model)

Coaxial out

Audio out

Audio in

Optical in

Audio out

Turntable

GND

Audio out

Optical out

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting to an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, do not make connections to the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the

amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• The signals output through the FRONT PRE OUT and

CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE

CONTROL settings.

• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see

page 72), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE

OUT jacks.

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel line output jacks.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel line output jacks.

3 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel line output jack.

4 SURROUND BACK PRE OUT jacks

Surround back or presence channel line output jacks.

5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the

corresponding speaker terminals.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level

using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker

levels” on page 60).

• Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE

OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 64) and

LFE/BASS OUT (see page 65) settings.

Notes

FRONT

SUB

WOOFER

CENTER SINGLE

PRE OUT

SURROUND

BACK

123

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Both FM and AM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2 Press and hold the tab to

insert the AM loop antenna

lead wires into the AM ANT

and GND terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna

for the best reception.

■ FREQUENCY STEP (General model only)

Be sure to set the frequency step according to the

frequency spacing in your area (see page 73).

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

Connecting the FM and AM antennas

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

TUNER

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna

GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

Notes

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting the AC power cord

Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models ................................... 1 outlet

Korea model ..............................................................None

Other models ........................................................2 outlets

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

other components to this unit. Power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s)

supply power to any connected component whenever this

unit is turned on. For information on the maximum power

(total power consumption of components), see

“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 102.

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

Asia model .........................220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model .....110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

■ Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost.

Connecting the power supply cord

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model)

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

If you are using 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to

4 or 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power.

Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.

1 Turn off the power to this unit, and while

holding down STRAIGHT (EFFECT), press

STANDBY/ON.

This unit turns on, and “SP IMP.” appears in the front

panel display.

2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to

select “4 Ω MIN”.

3 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power.

The setting you made is reflected the next time this

unit’s power is turned on.

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

Speaker impedance setting

CAUTION

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

SP IMP.

While holding

down, press

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

Turning on the power

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO SETUP

This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you

avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and

achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound

your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the auto setup procedure.

• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,

follow the troubleshooting on page 28.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes

appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible

sound from your system.

WIRING:

Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of

each speaker.

SIZE:

Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the

crossover/high cut frequency for the subwoofer to

improve the sound relationship between the speakers and

the subwoofer.

DISTANCE:

Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening

position and adjusts the delay of each channel so that the

sound from each speaker reaches the listening position at

the same time. Also checks the phase of each speaker.

EQUALIZING:

Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric

equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and

create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly

important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers

for some channels or have a room with unique sonic

characteristics.

YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three

parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the

seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly

precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.

LEVEL:

Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each

speaker.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

• After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to

disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface with the omni-directional

microphone head upward, at your normal

listening position.

If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer

mic at the same height as your ears would be when

you are seated in your listening position.

AUTO SETUP

Introduction

Notes

Optimizer microphone setup

Notes

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

(U.S.A. model)

Optimizer microphone position

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible

during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too

much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.

If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut

frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as

viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high

cut frequency to the maximum.

1 Switch on this unit and your video monitor.

Make sure the OSD is displayed.

2 Press AMP.

3 Press SET MENU.

When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select

any other SET MENU items (see page 60).

4 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP, then

press ENTER.

5 Press u / d to select SETUP, then press j / i

to select the desired setting.

AUTO To perform the auto setup procedure

(YPAO).

RELOAD To reload the last auto setup (YPAO)

settings to override any manual

changes.

UNDO To undo the last auto setup (YPAO) and

restore the previous settings.

DEFAULT To restore the factory preset (default)

setup parameters.

You can choose RELOAD or UNDO only if you have

already performed the auto setup procedure.

6 Press d to select “START”, then press

ENTER to start the setup procedure.

The screen changes as follows.

Starting the setup

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

Subwoofer

AMP

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

SET MENU

.;AUTOSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

;SIGNAL INFO.

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

1 AUTO:MENU

. SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

START



Automatic

processing

of all items

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

1 AUTO:MENU

SETUP;;; AUTO

. START

Automatic

processing

of all items

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Start

;;;;;;;

.WARNING (3)

RESULT

 SP : 5/4/0.1

 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft

 LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

.>SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

RESULT:EXIT

2 AUTO:CHECK

WIRING

INITIALZING

.

SIZE/DISTANCE.

EQUALIZING.

LEVEL.

CHECK CH=CENTER

|||||;;;;;;;;

[]:Exit

AUTO SETUP

The results displayed in the RESULT:EXIT screen

are as follows:

SP The number of connected speakers

displayed in the order:

Front/Back/Subwoofer

DIST The distance of the speakers from this

unit displayed in the order:

Closest speaker distance/Farthest

speaker distance

LVL The speaker output level displayed in

the order:

Lowest output level/Highest output

level

• If you selected AUTO in step 5, “WAITING”

appears when the auto setup procedure is started,

then loud test tones are output from each speaker in

turn.

• If you selected DEFAULT, RELOAD or UNDO in

step 5, no test tones are output.

• If an ERROR screen appears, see “If an error

screen appears” on page 26.

• If a WARNING screen appears, see “If a warning

screen appears” on page 27.

You can display the detailed result information by using d and

ENTER to select “RESULT”. In the detailed result information

screen, you can switch information by pressing

u / d / j / i.

7 Press j / i to select SET or CANCEL, then

press ENTER to return to the SET MENU

screen.

SET To apply the auto setup (YPAO)

settings.

CANCEL To cancel the auto setup (YPAO)

without making any changes.

If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust

each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page

52).

• If E-10 appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3.

• To cancel the auto setup procedure before completion, press u.

■ If an error screen appears

Use u / d / j / i to select RETRY or EXIT, then press

ENTER.

RETRY To retry the auto setup procedure.

EXIT To exit auto setup.

Notes

WARNING (3)

RESULT

 SP : 5/4/0.1

 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft

 LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

.>SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

RESULT:EXIT

ERROR

.E-9:USER CANCEL

.

.Don't operate

.any function.

.>RETRYEXIT

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

■ If a warning screen appears

1 Press ENTER to display detailed information

about the warning.

Press j / i to switch between warning messages.

For details about each message, see page 29.

• Warnings let you know about potential problems detected

during auto setup. Warnings will not cancel the auto setup.

• The number of warnings is displayed to the right of

“WARNING”.

• When the warning is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is

displayed.

2 When you are finished, press ENTER to

return to the RESULT:EXIT screen.

Continue from step 7 on page 26.

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate

your system.

• Depending on listening environments, SWFR PHASE:REV

appears in AUTO:CHECK and SUBWOOFER PHASE

parameter in the SETMENU (see page 66) is automatically set

to REVERSE. To select the desired setting, change the

SUBWOOFER PHASE parameter in the SETMENU.

• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer

than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your

subwoofer.

Notes

WARNING:W-1

.<OUT OF PHASE>

.Reverse Channel

.FL __

.CENTER

.PL PR

.SL SR

.SBL SBR

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

.WARNING (3)

RESULT

 SP : 5/4/0.1

 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft

 LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB

.>SET CANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

RESULT:EXIT

W-1 example screen

AUTO SETUP

■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure

Before auto setup

Errors during auto setup

Error message Cause Remedy

Connect MIC

Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP

Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1:NO FRONT SP

Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not

detected.

• Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A/B.

• Check the front left and right speaker connections.

• Turn on the power to the external amplifier (when the

front speaker signals are output from an external

amplifier).

E-2:NO SURR. SP

Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.

E-3:NO PRES. SP

Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.

E-4:SBR->SBL

Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT

SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you

only have one surround back speaker.

E-5:NOISY

Background noise is too loud. • Try the auto setup procedure in a quiet environment.

• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners

(etc.) or move them away from the optimizer

microphone.

E-6:CHECK SUR.

Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

• Connect surround speakers when you use (a)

surround back speaker(s).

• Check the surround speaker connections.

E-7:NO MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the auto setup procedure.

• Do not touch the optimizer microphone during the

auto setup procedure.

E-8:NO SIGNAL

The optimizer microphone does not detect test

tones.

• Check the microphone setting.

• Check the speaker connections and placement.

E-9:USER CANCEL

The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to

user activity.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not adjust

VOLUME (etc.) during the auto setup procedure.

E-10:INTERNAL

ERROR

A DSP communication error or hangup

occurred.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again.

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

Warnings after auto setup

Press j / i to display detailed information about individual warnings.

• If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again.

• If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.

• If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.

• If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Speaker polarity is not correct. This message

may appear depending on the speakers even

when the speakers are connected correctly.

• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity

(+ / –).

W-2:OVER 24m

The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is 24 m (80 ft) or more.

• Move the speaker closer to the listening position.

• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity

(+ / –).

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

The difference of volume level among speakers

is excessive. (No level correction is made.)

• Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers

are set in locations with similar conditions.

• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity

(+ / –).

• Use speakers of similar quality and efficiency.

PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B (or press AMP to

select the AMP mode, then press SPEAKERS

A or B on the remote control).

Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.

4 Select the input source.

Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input selector

buttons on the remote control) to select the input you

desire.

The current input source name and input mode appear

in the front panel display and video monitor for a few

seconds.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operating instructions for the component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

PLAYBACK

Basic operations

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

1 7 43

REC

AUDI O

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Front panel Remote control

SPEAKERS

A SPEAKERS B

Front panel

Remote control

AMP

INPUT

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX

DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

Front panel

Remote control

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

VOLUME

Selected input source

Input mode

VOLUME

VOL

Remote control

Front panel

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

7 Select a sound field program if desired.

Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP

mode, then press one of the sound field program

buttons) to select a sound field program. See page 56

for details about sound field programs.

■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT

CINEMA”)

“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT

CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect

headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to

CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When

activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI

CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

• “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or

the 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.

■ To adjust the tone

You can adjust the tonal quality

of your front left and right,

center, and subwoofer speakers or

headphones (when connected).

Press TONE CONTROL on the

front panel repeatedly to select

TREBLE or BASS, then rotate

PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease.

• Select TREBLE to adjust the

high frequency response.

• Select BASS to adjust the low

frequency response.

Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective during playback in the PURE

DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected

(page 35).

• When TONE BYPASS is set to “AUTO” (page 68), and BASS

and TREBLE are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically

bypasses this unit's tone control circuitry.

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator blinks in the

front panel display.

To resume the audio output, press

MUTE again (or press VOL –/+).

The MUTE indicator disappears

from the display.

You can adjust the muting level (see page 68).

Notes

PROGRAM

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

CHP/INDEX

AMP

Remote control

Front panel

Notes

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MUTE

PLAYBACK

■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the

remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in

the front panel display and video monitor.

MULTI CH INPUT

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,

no other source can be played. To select another input source with

INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH

INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to turn off

“MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel display.

■ Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Use the input selector buttons on the remote

control to select a video source, then select an

audio source.

If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

together with a video source, first select the video source, then

press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote

control).

■ Front panel operation

Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel

Remote control

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX

DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

Selecting sound field programs

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

PROGRAM

(U.S.A. model)

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

VOLUME

HiFi DSP

L R

TV Sports

Program name

PROGRAM

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Remote control operation

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

one of the sound field program buttons to select

the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display.

Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,

and not on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/

24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field

programs will be applied.

■ Enjoying multi-channel software

If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel

sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX

or DTS-ES decoders.

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch

between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback.

To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly when

PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed.

Auto (AUTO)

When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is

input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing

back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.

If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in

the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/

7.1 channels.

Decoders (select with j / i)

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the format of the software you are playing.

PLIIxMovie

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.

PLIIxMusic

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.

EX/ES

For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the

DTS-ES decoder.

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.

Off (OFF)

Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.

When “SUR. B SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 65), the

surround back channel will be output from the left SURROUND

BACK speaker terminals.

Notes

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Sound field

program

buttons

AMP

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

VOLUME

HiFi DSP

L R

TV Sports

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

CHP/INDEX

AMP

Program name

EXTD SUR.

AMP

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

PLAYBACK

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder (PLIIx Movie,

PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is

pressed in the following cases:

– When “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 64) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see

page 65) is set to NONE.

– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is

being played.

– When the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When “2ch Stereo” or PURE DIRECT is selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, this setting will be

reset to AUTO.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R

SP” is set to NONE (see page 65).

• PLIIxMovie cannot be selected when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to

SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 65).

■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multiple channels.

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

STANDARD on the remote control to switch

between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR.

ENHANCED programs.

Or press MOVIE to select the MOVIE THEATER

program.

Press SELECT on the remote control to select

the decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending on the

type of software you are playing and your personal

preference.

When you select the SUR. STANDARD program:

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

When you select the SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE

THEATER program:

PRO LOGIC

Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.

Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote

control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message

display.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R

SP” is set to NONE (see page 59).

Notes

AMP

STANDARD

MOVIE

SELECT

Note

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

(PURE DIRECT)

PURE DIRECT allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders

and DSP processors, and turn off the video circuitry and

front panel display to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from

analog and PCM sources.

Press PURE DIRECT (or press AMP to select the

AMP mode, then press PURE DIRECT on the

remote control) to activate pure direct.

The indicator around the front panel button lights up.

The front panel display switches on momentarily when an

operation is performed.

To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.

The indicator around the front panel button goes out and

the previous settings are restored.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input.

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• The following operations are not possible during PURE

DIRECT operation:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the OSD

– adjusting SET MENU parameters

– all video functions (video conversion etc.)

• PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is

set to the standby mode.

■ Night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the

type of material you are playing.

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

NIGHT repeatedly on the remote control to select

cinema or music.

When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in

the front panel display lights up.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources

to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.

Press j / i to adjust the effect level while

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

This adjusts the level of compression.

• Select MIN for minimum compression.

• Select MID for standard compression.

• Select MAX for maximum compression.

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored

independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT

or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT indicator lights

up when PURE DIRECT is selected).

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Notes

PURE DIRECT

Front panel Remote control

AMP

Notes

ENT.

NIGHT

CHP/INDEX

AMP

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

PLAYBACK

■ Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-

channel sources.

Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the

AMP mode, then press STEREO on the remote

control) to select 2ch Stereo.

2ch Stereo

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or

BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”.

■ Listening to unprocessed input signals

In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are

output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels without any additional effect processing.

Press STRAIGHT to select STRAIGHT.

STRAIGHT

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT”

disappears from the display when you want to turn the

sound effect back on.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to NONE (see page 64), Virtual

CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you

select a CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SUR. L/R

SP” is set to NONE (see page 64) in the following cases:

– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

STEREO

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

AMP

Note

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

Front panel

Remote control

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signals you want to

use.

1 Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input

selector buttons on the remote control) to

select the input source.

2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.

In most cases, use AUTO.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

1) Digital signals

2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate

decoder.

You can adjust the default input mode of this unit (see page 70).

• When playing a DTS-CD/LD, be sure to set the INPUT MODE

to DTS.

• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player

depending on the player.

■ Displaying information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1 Select the input source.

2 Press STRAIGHT.

STRAIGHT

Selecting input modes

INPUT

Front panel

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX

DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

Remote control

INPUT MODE

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

VOLUME

Input modeInput source

Front panel

INPUT MODE

Remote control

Notes

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX

DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

PLAYBACK

3 Press u / d to display the following

information about the input signal.

(Format) Signal format display. When the unit

cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

in Number of source channels in the input

signal. For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2

surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/LFE”.

fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is

unable to detect the sampling

frequency “Unknown” appears.

rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to

detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.

flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby

Digital signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to

begin automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l

to tune into a lower frequency.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown in the front panel display.

FM/AM TUNING

Automatic and manual tuning

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING/CH

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

3 312 4

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

FM/AM

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Lights up

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

/VCR2

AUTO

TUNED

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

/VCR2

AUTO

TUNED

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

FM/AM TUNING

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station

will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception

to increase the signal quality.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 as described in

“Automatic tuning”.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune

into the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

■ Automatically presetting FM stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through

E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Disappears

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

/VCR2

AUTO

TUNED

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

Presetting stations

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

231

(U.S.A. model)

FM/AM

DISPLAY

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUTO

Lights up

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

/VCR2

AUTO

TUNED

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

presetting starts from the frequency currently

displayed and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually,

and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting

stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options:

You can select the preset number from which this unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

to select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l to begin

tuning toward the lower frequencies.

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations in 5 groups,

A1 through E8) manually.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 39 for tuning instructions.

When tuned into a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) repeatedly to select

a preset station group (A to E) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

AUTO

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

L R

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

43 2,5

(U.S.A. model)

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

VOLUME

L R

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

Preset group

FM/AM TUNING

4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

When performing this operation with the remote control, first

press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) (or A–E/CAT. j / i on

the remote control) to select the preset

station group.

The preset group letter appears in the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

Notes

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

Preset number

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

VOLUME

MEMORY

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

Selecting preset stations

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

EFFECTMEMORY

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

(U.S.A. model)

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

Front panel

Remote control

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

FM/AM TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET u / d on the remote control) to

select a preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1”.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

Front panel

Remote control

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Exchanging preset stations

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

2,4 1,31,3

(U.S.A. model)

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED MEMORY

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED MEMORY

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

FM/AM TUNING

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with

millions of listeners across the U.S. Broadcasting live

daily. XM’s channel lineup includes more than 130 digital

channels of choice from coast to coast: 68 commercial-

free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical

to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier

sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment

programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic

and weather information for major metropolitan areas

nationwide.

Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you

will need to set up an account and activate service with

XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check

your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio”

on page 47. For further information on XM Satellite Radio

services, see the XM Satellite Radio website at

“http://www.xmradio.com”.

• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48

contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii).

• XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory and monthly

subscription are sold separately. For details, see the XM

Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com”.

■ Connecting the XM connect and Play

digital antenna accessory

Connect the XM connect and Play digital antenna

accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear of

this unit. (For details, see the operating instructions

provided with the XM connect and Play digital antenna

accessory).

• For information on obtaining the XM connect and Play digital

antenna accessory, see the website at “http://

www.xmradio.com” or visit your local retailer that sells XM

Ready products.

• To ensure optimal reception of XM’s satellite signal, the XM

connect and Play digital antenna accessory should be placed at

or near a southerly facing window with nothing obstructing its

path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

What is XM Satellite Radio?

Notes

XM Satellite Radio connections

Notes

XM/DT

XM jack

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

This section describes the functions of each control used

for XM Satellite Radio tuning.

■ Front panel functions

The following controls are only available when the unit is in the

TUNER mode and the XM connect and Play digital antenna

accessory is connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit (For

details, see “XM Satellite Radio connections”).

1 SEARCH MODE

Switches between the All Channel Search, Category

Search, and Preset Search modes. (For details, see “XM

Satellite Radio search modes” on page 49)

2 XM

Switches the reception band between AM, FM and XM.

3 CATEGORY

(All Channel Search mode)

Changes the channel category to next one (while staying

in the All Channel Search mode).

(Category Search mode)

Changes the channel category to next one.

(Preset Search mode)

Switches between five preset groups (A to E).

4 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h

(All Channel Search mode)

Searches a radio channel within all channels. Press and

hold for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Searches a radio channel within the selected category.

Press and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Changes the preset number (1 to 8).

5 MEMORY

Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.

6 DISPLAY

Switches XM information such as channel number/name,

category, or artist name/song title displayed in the front

panel display and on-screen display. (For details, see

“Switching XM information in the front panel display” on

page 48).

■ Remote control functions

The following controls are only available when the unit is in the TUNER mode.

To switch to the TUNER mode, press TUNER to select TUNER as input source.

1 BAND

Switches the reception band between the currently

selected band (AM or FM) and XM.

2 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i

(All Channel Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category.

Press PRESET/CH u / d to search a radio channel

within all channels. Press and hold for quick search.

(Category Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT.

to change the channel category.

Press PRESET/CH

to search a radio channel within

the selected category. Press and hold for quick search.

(Preset Search mode)

Press A-E/CAT.

to change the preset group (A to E).

Press PRESET/CH

to change the preset number (1 to 8).

3 MEMORY

Switches the unit to the preset memory mode.

4 Numeric buttons

(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)

Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.

(Preset Search mode)

Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.

5 SRCH MODE

Switches between the All Channel Search, Category

Search, and Preset Search modes. (For details, see “XM

Satellite Radio search modes” on page 49)

6 DISPLAY

Switches XM information such as channel number/name,

category, or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel

display and on-screen display. (For details, see “Switching XM

information in the front panel display” on page 48).

7 ENT.

Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct

Number Access mode (see page 51).

XM Satellite Radio functions

Note

AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM

LEVEL

SEARCH MODE

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

CATEGORY

DISPLAY

Note

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

+10

ENT.

NIGHT

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

SPEAKERSA B

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio

service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.

Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and

then access the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com”

or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a

major credit card for signing up.

1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote

control) to select TUNER as the input source.

2 Press XM (or BAND on the remote control) to

select “XM” as the reception band.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel

display, the XM connect and Play digital antenna

accessory may not be connected to the XM jack on

the rear of this unit properly. See “XM Satellite Radio

connections” on page 45 and check the connection.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to

select channel “0”.

You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode

(see page 49) is not selected.

4 Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number

displayed in the front panel display and write

it down.

ID:_____________________________________

Activating XM Satellite Radio

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

Front panel

Remote control

FM/AM

TITLE

Front panel

CDTUNER

DVD

V-AUX

VCR

XM RADIO

Lights

Remote control

Note

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

■ Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode

1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote

control) to select TUNER as the input source.

2 Press XM (or BAND on the remote control) to

select “XM” as the reception band.

Information (such as channel number/name, category,

or artist name/song title) for the channel currently

selected appears in the front panel display and the

XM indicator lights up.

• Selecting the “XM” band automatically recalls the channel

previously selected.

• You can change the kind of XM information by pressing

DISPLAY repeatedly. (For details, see “Switching XM

information in the front panel display” on page 48).

XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output from the AUDIO

OUT (REC) jacks.

■ Switching XM information in the front

panel display

You can display XM information (such as channel

number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the

channel currently selected in the front panel display.

Press DISPLAY on the unit (or remote control

during the TUNER mode) repeatedly to toggle

between the following channel information

display modes.

When the channel number/name is displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name/song title is displayed:

• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric

characters at once. If the information contains more than 14

characters, the information scrolls from right to left.

• If the information contains a character that cannot be

recognized by the unit, the character will be displayed with an

underbar “_”.

If a status message or an error message appears in the display, see

“Status and error messages” on page 54.

Basic XM Satellite Radio

operations

Note

AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM

LEVEL

SEARCH MODE

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS

INPUT

CATEGORY

DISPLAY

INPUT

Front panel

Remote control

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

[001] Preview

FM/AM

TITLE

Front panel

Remote control

Lights

Note

DISPLAY

Channel name/number

Channel category

Artist name/Song title

Front panel

Remote control

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

[040] Deep Tra

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

<CAT>Rock

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

Coldplay / Clo

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Displaying XM information in the on-

screen display

You can display XM information on a video monitor by

pressing DISPLAY. It is much easier to see the available

information than reading it on the front panel display.

• In the SET MENU (see page 73), you can set the time for

displaying XM information in the on-screen display.

• When “XM DISPLAY” in the SET MENU is set to “OFF”, you

cannot display XM information in the on-screen display.

• If the information contains a character that cannot be

recognized by the unit (on-screen display program), the

character will be displayed with an underbar “_”.

You can search for the channel you want to listen to using

one of three search modes. You can also enter the number

directly to select the desired channel (For details, see

“Direct Number Access mode” on page 51).

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 48.

2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL

CH SEARCH”.

XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM:040

CHAN:Deep Tracks

CAT:Rock

NAME:Coldplay

TITLE:Clocks

.(Coldplay/Clo)

[]/[]:CHANNEL

[<]/[>]:CATEGORY

XM Satellite Radio search modes

AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM

LEVEL

SEARCH MODE

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS

INPUT

CATEGORY

DISPLAY

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

ALL CH SEARCH

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

3 To change the channel category, press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote

control) repeatedly.

To search a channel within all channels,

press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control)

repeatedly.

You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and

holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d

on the remote control).

■ Category Search mode

1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 48.

2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT

SEARCH”.

3 To change the channel category, press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote

control) repeatedly.

To search a channel within the selected

channel category, press PRESET/TUNING/CH

l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote

control) repeatedly.

You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and

holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d

on the remote control).

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM

LEVEL

SEARCH MODE

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS

INPUT

CATEGORY

DISPLAY

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

CAT SEARCH

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you should preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels”

on page 52. All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001

Preview” by the factory setting.

1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 48.

2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select

“PRESET SEARCH”.

3 To change the preset group (A to E), press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote

control) repeatedly.

To change the preset number (1 to 8), press

PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH

u / d on the remote control) repeatedly.

You can also select the preset number directly by pressing the

numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio

mode” on page 48.

2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on

the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL

CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.

AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM

LEVEL

SEARCH MODE

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS

INPUT

CATEGORY

DISPLAY

CDTUNER

DVD

V-AUX

VCR

PRESET SEARCH

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

+10

ENT.

NIGHT

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

SPEAKERSAB

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

ALL CH SEARCH

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

CAT SEARCH

SEARCH MODE

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

Front panel Remote control

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

desired channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons as shown below.

The display changes as follows.

4 If you enter fewer than three numbers you

may press ENT. to tune to the channel

immediately or wait a few seconds to confirm

the entered channel number.

• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after entering one-

digit or two-digit number, the unit automatically confirms the

entered channel number.

• Pressing a button other than numeric buttons or ENT. cancels

the direct number access procedure.

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (eight preset numbers in five preset

groups, A1 to E8). You can then recall any preset channel

easily by selecting the preset group and number as

described in “Preset Search mode” on page 51.

1 Search the XM Satellite Radio channel you

want to set as a preset channel.

To search the desired channel, carry out “All Channel

Search mode” or “Category Search mode” on page

46, or “Direct Number Access mode” on page 51.

2 Press MEMORY on the unit (or remote

control during the TUNER mode).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about five

seconds.

STEREO

MUSIC

ENTERTAIN

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR1

DVR/VCR2

<XM> -12

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

<XM>123

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR1

DVR/VCR2

<XM> --1

ENT.

Setting XM Satellite Radio preset

channels

AUTO/MAN'L MONOMAN'L/AUTO FM

LEVEL

SEARCH MODE

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

EDIT

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHTSPEAKERS

INPUT

CATEGORY

DISPLAY

2,5

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

[040] Deep Tra

When the channel number “040” is selected

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

RETURN

Flashes

Front panel

Remote control

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT.

on the remote

control) to select a preset group (A to E).

The group letter appears.

4 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,

press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or

PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to

select a preset number (1 to 8).

5 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing,

press MEMORY on the unit (or the remote

control) to preset the selected XM Satellite

Radio channel.

A colon appears next to the preset number for

confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off.

Presetting a new channel clears the former preset channel stored

in the same preset group and number.

Note

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED MEMORY

C [040] Deep

Preset group

CATEGORY

A/B/C/D/E

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED MEMORY

C5 [040] Deep

Preset number

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

Front panel

Remote control

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

C5:[040] Deep

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Colon appears

MEMORY

RETURN

Front panel

Remote control

XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING

■ Status and error messages

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.

Message Cause Remedy

CHECK ANTENNA

The XM connect and Play digital antenna

accessory is not connected, or does not work

properly.

• Check the XM connect and Play digital antenna

accessory connections.

UPDATING

The XM user encryption code is being updated. • Wait until the encryption code is updated.

NO SIGNAL

The signal is too weak. • Check the XM connect and Play digital antenna

accessory connections and orient it for the best

reception.

It takes longer than four seconds for audio or

text data to be decoded.

• Wait until the decoding process has finished.

OFF AIR

The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is

not currently broadcasting any signal.

• Check the channel number again or select another

XM Satellite Radio channel.

<XM> - - -

The channel station ID (SID) is no longer

available.

- - - / - - -

No artist name/feature or song/program title is

available.

<CAT> - - -

No channels are available for the selected

category.

• Select another channel category by pressing

CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote

control) repeatedly.

RECORDING

BASIC

OPERATION

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operating instructions for those components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SPEAKER

LEVEL” (page 66) and programs does not affect recorded

material.

• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal to your VCR.

• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not

output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.

Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are

not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your

source component is connected to provide only digital (or

analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

■ Special considerations when recording

DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player

is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X

DVD

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AUX

DVDVCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

Notes

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 37) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.1

Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to

select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on page 32 to 36.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Remote

control

button

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel (left and right) or plays back 2-channel

sources as is.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC:

POP/ROCK

This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at

an actual jazz or rock concert.

ENTERTAINMENT:

TV Sports

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the

sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching

various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence

sound field.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Game

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

MOVIE THEATER:

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and

the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER:

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the

latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic

space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that

includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most

advanced techniques.

MOVIE THEATER:

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design

of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be

similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are

restrained as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER:

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multi-

channel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for the selected decoder.

MULTI

2-CH

SUR. ENHANCED

Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

Remote

control

button

Program Features Sources

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to

select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on page 32 to 36.

For music sources

Remote

control

button

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

2-channel (left and right) playback.

2-CH

STEREO:

7ch Stereo

Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a

larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

MUSIC:

Hall in Vienna

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700

seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce

a very full, rich sound.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC:

The Bttm Line

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a

famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a

sound field offering a real and vibrant sound.

MUSIC:

The Roxy Thtr

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for

this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at

the center-left of the hall.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively

disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also

characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for the selected decoder.

MULTI

2-CH

SUR. ENHANCED

Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can display this unit’s operating information on a

video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound

field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much

easier to see the available options and parameters than it is

by reading this information on the front panel display.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the

OSD mode.

The OSD mode changes in the

following order: full display, short

display, and display off.

Full display

Always shows the sound field program parameter settings

as well as the contents of the front panel display.

Short display

Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the

bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.

Display off

Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are

displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU,

even if the OSD mode is set to “Display off”.

• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will

not be recorded.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a

video source is not being reproduced (or the source component

is turned off) by using “DISPLAY SET” (see page 71).

• When using component video signals, the “Short display” is not

output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

To display the OSD with component video signal input, set the

OSD mode to “Full Display” while GRAY BACK in DISPLAY

SET (see page 71) is set to AUTO.

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

■ Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set

the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front

panel display changes as shown

below. The SLEEP indicator flashes

while switching the amount of time

for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Selecting the OSD mode

Notes

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

P04

MOVIE THEATER

.General

DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;15ms

P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;20ms

S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0

P04MOVIETHEATER

General

Full display Short display

Using the sleep timer

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

SLEEP

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

VOLUME

SLEEP

HiFi DSP

CD PHONOTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR1

DVR/VCR2

TUNED

VOLUME

SLEEP

TV Sports

SLEEP indicator

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in

the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator goes off.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front

panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

Please note that this operation will override the level

adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24),

“SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 66).

1 Press AMP.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

FRONT L Front left speaker level

CENTER Center speaker level

FRONT R Front right speaker level

SUR.R Surround right speaker level

SUR.L Surround left speaker level

SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker level

SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker level

SWFR Subwoofer level

PRES.L Presence left speaker level

PRES.R Presence right speaker level

Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by

pressing u / d.

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

4 Press ENTER when you have completed your

adjustment.

This operation can also be performed using the controls on the

front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you

want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level.

SLEEP

SLEEP OFF

Manually adjusting speaker levels

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ AUTO SETUP

Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 24).

■ MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

1 SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). You can use SOUND

MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first

2 INPUT MENU

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs.

SET MENU

Item Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over

frequency.

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

D)EQUALIZER

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)AUDIO SET

Customizes the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.

Item Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT MODE

Selects the initial input mode of the source.

C)INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the inputs.

D)VOLUME TRIM

Adjusts the output volume of each jack.

SET MENU

3 OPTION MENU

Use to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ SIGNAL INFO

Use to check audio Signal information (see page 37).

Item Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.

C)PARAM. INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

D)MULTI ZONE SET

Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals or selects how

the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.

E)XM RADIO SET

Displays the current reception level for the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory.

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

• You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

• If you press a sound field program button during SET MENU

operation, the SET MENU is canceled.

You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit

is in either cinema or music night listening mode.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press SET MENU.

3 Press u / d to select MANUAL SETUP.

4 Press ENTER to enter MANUAL SETUP.

1 SOUND MENU appears on the front panel display.

5 Press u / d to select the desired menu.

6 Press ENTER to enter the selected menu.

7 Press u / d and ENTER to select the

submenu, then press u / d to select the item

and j / i to change the parameter.

• Repeat this operation to select and adjust each

setting.

• To return to the previous menu level, press

RETURN.

8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.

Using SET MENU

Note

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

2,8

3-7

AMP

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL



SET MENU

;AUTOSETUP

.;MANUALSETUP

.;SIGNAL INFO.

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

;MANUAL SETUP

.1SOUNDMENU

2INPUTMENU

3OPTIONMENU

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

CH CH

PRESET/CH

TV VOL

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)EQUALIZER

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 1/2

-+

.FL

FR

 C

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

SET MENU

SRCH MODE

SET MENU

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or

projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set

automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24)

■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS

OUT”.

• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: LRG, SML, NONE

• Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit

directs the entire range of the center channel signal to

the center speaker.

• Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The unit

directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to

the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP

Choices: LRG, SML, NONE

• Select LRG if you have large surround left and right

speakers. The entire range of the surround channel

signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

• Select SML if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.

This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 36) and automatically set the surround

back speaker setting (SUR. B L/R SP) to NONE.

1 SOUND MENU

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)EQUALIZER

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 1/2

 SMALL)LARGE

FRONT SP

NONE)SMLLRG

CENTER SP

NONE)SMLLRG

SUR. L/R SP

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Surround back speakers SUR. B L/R SP

Choices: LRGx1, LRGx2, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE

• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back

speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the left surround back

speaker.

• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back

speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back

speakers.

• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channels are directed to the speakers selected with

“LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency

signals are directed to the left surround back speaker.

• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

If you select SMLx1 or LRGx1, connect the speaker to the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Choices: YES, NONE

• Select YES if you have presence speakers.

• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.

When YES is selected, the unit automatically adjusts the dialog

lift parameter. To adjust it manually, see page 92.

Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers

according to the characteristics of your system. This

setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS

sources.

Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.

• Select FRNT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front speakers according to the speaker settings

(even if you have previously set front speakers to

SML).

• Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want

to output low-frequency signals from front channels to

both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-

frequency signals from other channels are also directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use

this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using

the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.

Cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Note

SMLx1)SMLx2

SUR. B L/R SP

)NONEYES

PRESENCE SP

SWFRFRNT)BOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

FREQ;;;80Hz

CROSS OVER

SET MENU

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to

switch the phase of your subwoofer.

Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE

• Select NORMAL if you do not want to reverse the

phase of your subwoofer.

• Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

Presence/Surround back channel priority

PRIORITY

You can select to prioritize either the surround back or

presence speakers when playing sources that contain

surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound

field programs.

Choices: PRch, SBch

• Select PRch to use presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from

surround speakers.

• Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a

surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA

DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output

from front speakers.

■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker level of

each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 64).

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Initial Setting: 0 dB

• FL adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.

• FR adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.

• C adjusts the balance of the center speaker.

• SL adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker.

• SR adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker.

• SBL

adjusts the balance of the surround back left

speaker.

• SBR

adjusts the balance of the surround back right

speaker.

• SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.

• PL adjusts the balance of the presence left speaker.

• PR adjusts the balance of the presence right speaker.

Instead of SBL and SBR, SB will be displayed if you selected

only one surround back speaker in SUR. B L/R SP (page 65).

)NORMALREVERSE

02ASUBWOOFER PHASE





PRch )SBch



PRIORITY

-+

.FL

FR

 C

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)

Other models: meters (m)

• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.

• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)

• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SB L

adjusts the distance of the surround back left

speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• SB R

adjusts the distance of the surround back right

speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial

setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

Instead of SB L and SB R, SUR. B will be displayed if you

selected only one surround back speaker in SUR. B L/R SP

(page 65).

■ Center graphic equalizer D)EQUALIZER

Use this feature to select the parametric (AUTO PEQ) or

graphic equalizer (CNTR GEQ).

Equalizer EQ TYPE SELECT

Select to change the type of equalizer used by this unit.

Choices: AUTO PEQ, CNTR GEQ, EQ OFF

• Select AUTO PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in auto

setup.

• Select CNTR GEQ to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer so that the tonal quality of the center speaker

matches that of the front left and right speakers.

• Select EQ OFF to cancel equalizing.

Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ

When CNTR GEQ is selected, use this feature to output a

test tone and adjust the tonal quality so that it matches that

of the front left speaker.

You can adjust 5 frequency bands:

100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz

Choices: –6 to +6 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

• Select ON to output test tones from the front left and

center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the

center speaker.

• Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the

currently selected source component.

• Press u / d to select a frequency band.

• Press j / i to adjust the selected frequency band.

. UNIT;;;;;;meters

FRONTL;;;;3.00m

FRONTR;;;;3.00m

CENTER;;;;;3.00m

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

C)SP

DISTANCE

.TEST)OFFON

-+

100Hz0dB

300Hz0dB

1kHz0dB

3kHz0dB

10kHz0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

D)EQUALIZER

SET MENU

■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 dB

Speaker SPEAKER

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE LEVEL”, some signals may

not be output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack.

■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to

be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is

effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and

DTS signals.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX

(maximum)

Speaker SP

Select to adjust the speaker compression.

Headphone HP

Select to adjust the headphone compression.

• Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume

levels.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of

dynamic range.

■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET

Use to customize this units overall audio settings.

Muting type MUTING TYPE

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

output volume.

Choices: FULL, –20dB

• Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound.

• Select –20dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay AUDIO DELAY

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 160 ms

Tone bypass TONE BYPASS

Use to select whether audio output bypasses tone control

circuitry when TREBLE and BASS are set to 0 dB (see

page 31).

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• Select AUTO if you want signals to bypass tone

control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.

• Select OFF if you do not want signals to bypass tone

control circuitry.

Note

.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

E)LFE

LEVEL

.SP:MINSTD)MAX

HP:MINSTD)MAX

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

.MUTING TYPE;;FULL

AUDIODELAY;;0ms

TONE BYPASS;;AUTO

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

G)AUDIO SET

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode

or rename your inputs.

■ Input/output assignment

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your

needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the

respective jacks and effectively connect more

components.

Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using INPUT on the front

panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (CMPNT-V

INPUT [A]

) and B (CMPNT-V INPUT [B])

Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1,

DVR/VCR2

[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1,

DVR/VCR2

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OPTICAL OUT (1))

Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2

For OPTICAL INPUT jack 2 (OPTICAL IN (2)

(OPTICAL IN (3)) and 4 (OPTICAL IN (4))

Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

VCR1, DVR/VCR2

(3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

VCR1, DVR/VCR2

(4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

VCR1, DVR/VCR2

For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 (COAXIAL IN (5)

)

and 6

(COAXIAL IN (6))

Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2

(6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL,

V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

2 INPUT MENU

.A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUTMODE

C)INPUTRENAME

D)VOLUME TRIM

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter





INPUT



.[A];;;;;DVD

(DVD)

[B];;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL)



CMPNT-V



INPUT

.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R )



OPTICAL



OUT

Notes

.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R)

(3);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(4);;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL )



OPTICAL



.(5);;;;; CD

(CD)

(6);;;;; DVD

(DVD )



COAXIAL



SET MENU

■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

this unit (see page 37 for details about the input mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect

the type of input signal and select the appropriate input

mode.

• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that source.

Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button

will not be recalled.

■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the

OSD and front panel display.

1 Press an input selector button to select the

input you want to change the name of.

2 Press AMP.

3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

4 Press u / d to select the character you want,

then use j / i to move to the next space.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press d to change the character in the following

order, or press u to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space,

symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.)

5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each

input.

6 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.

■ Volume Trim D) VOLUME TRIM

Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input to

each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of

each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume

when switching between input sources.

Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/

CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2

Note

)AUTOLAST

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



B)INPUT



MODE

DVD->DVD

[<]/[>]:Position

[]/[]:Chara.



C)INPUT



RENAME

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

Video conversion VIDEO CONV.

Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite

(VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals.

This allows you to output converted video signals from

the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no

S-video or component signals are input. This feature also

converts S-video signals to component signals when no

component signals are input.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select OFF not to convert any signals. (except S-video

signals to composite signals)

• Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video and

component signals, and to convert S-video signals to

component signals.

• Regardless of the setting, S-video signals are always

converted to composite signals.

• Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (i.e., S-video) between each component.

• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a

VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer

depending on your VCR.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

• Press + to lower the position of the OSD.

• Press – to raise the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays

a gray background when there’s no video signal input.

Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

• When only the component video signals are input, the OSD is

not displayed if GRAY BACK is set to OFF. To display the

OSD with component video signal input, set GRAY BACK to

AUTO while the OSD mode (see page 59) is set to “Full

Display”.

• When video signals are not being input, set GRAY BACK to

AUTO to display the OSD.

Component OSD CMPNT OSD

Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when

using the SET MENU.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to output the OSD signals from

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD

signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

SET MENU functions even when OFF is selected.

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

Select ON to protect:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• All speaker levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select any

other SET MENU items.

3 OPTION MENU

Notes

.A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORYGUARD

C)PARAM.INI

D)MULTI ZONESET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter





OPTION



.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

VIDEOCONV.;;;ON

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0

GRAYBACK;;;AUTO

CMPNTOSD;;;;;ON

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:sELECT



A)DISPLAY



SET

Notes

Note

)OFFON

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



B)MEMORY



GUARD

SET MENU

■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

Choices:

An asterisk (*) appears next to program numbers that have

been changed from their initial settings.

Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,

MOVIE, STANDAND

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a

sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual

sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY

GUARD” is set to ON.

■ Zone set D) MULTI ZONE SET

Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Speaker B setting SP B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main room.

• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is

turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit

when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both

headphones and SPEAKERS B.

• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B,

the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP

(U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only)

Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.

Choices: INT, EXT

• Select EXT if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you

connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external

amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.

• Select INT to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you

connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s

PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.

■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET

XM information display time

XM DISPLAY

Use to set the time for displaying XM information in the

on-screen display. If “10s” or “30s” is selected, xm

information is displayed for 10 or 30 seconds after

pressing DISPLAY.

Choices: OFF, 10s, 30s, ON

When “XM DISPLAY” in the SET MENU is set to “ON”,

pressing DISPLAY shows xm information until you select

another input source (see page 30).

XM Radio antenna XM ANT.

Use to check the current reception level for the XM

connect and Play digital antenna accessory connected to

this unit. For the best reception, orient the XM connect

and Play digital antenna accessory so that a value of XX%

or more is displayed here.

Range: NONE, 0 to 100%

“NONE” is displayed if the XM connect and Play digital antenna

accessory is not connected to this unit. If this happens, check the

antenna connections (see page 45).

Notes

STEREO

*MUSIC

ENTERTAINMENT

MOVIE THEATER

*STANDARD

Press DSP Key



C)PARAM.



INI

.SPB;;;;;;;;FRONT

ZONE2 AMP;;;;;EXT

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



D)MULTI ZONE



SET

Notes

Note

.SPB;;;;;;;;FRONT

ZONE2 AMP;;;;;EXT

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return



D)MULTI ZONE



SET

E)XM RADIO SET

XM DISPLAY;;;10S

XM ANTENNA;;;75%

[<]/[>]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

ADVANCED SETUP MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

The ADVANCED SETUP menu is displayed in the front

panel display.

• During the advanced setup procedure, audio output is muted.

• During the advanced setup procedure, only the STANDBY/ON,

STRAIGHT (EFFECT) buttons, and PROGRAM selector on

the front panel are available for operation.

Be sure to set the speaker impedance before using this unit

to play back audio or video signals.

1 Turn off the power to this unit, and while

holding down STRAIGHT (EFFECT), press

STANDBY/ON.

This unit turns on, and the ADVANCED SETUP

menu appears in the front panel display.

2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu

and select the item you want to set up.

See the end of this section for a complete list of

available parameters.

3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to

toggle between the available parameters.

4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your

selection.

This completes the advanced setup procedure.

The settings you made are reflected the next time this

unit’s power is turned on.

ADVANCED SETUP MENU

CAUTION

DISPLAY

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

LEVEL

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

1,4 2

1,3

(U.S.A. model)

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

While holding

down, press

PROGRAM

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

ADVANCED SETUP MENU

■ ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each

parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

Speaker impedance SP IMP.

Use to switch the speaker impedance for this unit.

Choices: 8 Ω MIN, 4 Ω MIN

• Select 8 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω.

• Select 4 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 4 Ω.

• The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems

(A and B) simultaneously when SP IMP is set to the 8 Ω MIN

position.

Factory presets PRESET

Use to reset all parameters to the factory presets (see

page 98).

Choices: CANCEL, RESET

• Select CANCEL if you do not want this unit’s

parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory

presets.

• Select RESET if you want all of this unit’s parameters

to be initialized when you reset the factory presets.

This setting does not affect ADVANCED SETUP menu item

parameters.

Remote REMOTE

Use to switch the ID for the remote control of this unit.

Choices: ID1, ID2

• Select ID1 to operate this unit using the default code.

• Select ID2 to operate this unit using an alternative

code.

You must also make settings for the remote control (see page 76).

< Asia and General models only >

Tuner TU

Use to switch the frequency step selection according to the

frequency spacing in your area.

Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50

• North, Central and South America:

AM10/FM100 (kHz)

• Other areas: AM9/FM50 (kHz)

SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level

4 Ω ΜΙΝ

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 4 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 6 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

8 Ω ΜΙΝ

Front

If you use one set (A or B),

the impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

If you use two sets (A and

B), the impedance of each

speaker must be 16 Ω or

higher.

Center

The impedance of each

speaker must be 8 Ω or

higher.

Surround

Surround back

Note

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and

other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate remote control

codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote

controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

after pressing AMP to activate the AMP mode.

Fixing the remote to AMP mode

You can fix the remote permanently to AMP mode (fixed AMP

mode) so that the shaded areas above always control this unit.

This is useful, if you primarily want to use the remote control in

AMP mode. To fix AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3

seconds so that “A:___” appears in the display window.

To temporarily switch to component control mode, press AMP.

To cancel fixed AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3

seconds.

■ Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected component. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected

component appears in the display window.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

The buttons in the

dotted lines control

this unit in any

mode (SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, INPUT

MODE, MULTI CH

IN, VOLUME +/–,

MUTE,

STRAIGHT and

input selector

buttons) function in

any mode.

Press AMP

to control

this unit.

Fixed AMP mode

Component control mode

A:DVD DVD

TRANSMIT

RE-NAME

INPUT MODE

PHONO

CDMD/CD-RTUNERV-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

CH CH

VOL

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

A-E/CAT.

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENTER

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

EFFECTMEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1DTV/CBL DVR/VCR2

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

CLEAR LEARN

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

CH CH

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

BAND

TV INPUT

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

MOVIEENTERTAINMUSICSTEREO

4321

ENT.

PURE DIRECT

EXTD SUR.STANDARD SELECT

NIGHT

SPEAKERSAB

MEMORY

CHP/INDEX

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE

ENTER

TV VOL

AVTV

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

The A/B and input selector

buttons switch the function

of the component control

area below.

Use the A/B buttons to

control other components

regardless of whether they

are connected to this unit.

Factory setting:

A...LD player

B...CD recorder

SELECT k/n switches

control to another

component without

changing the input source

on this unit.

Component control

area

You can control up to 11

different components by

setting appropriate remote

control codes (see

page 76).

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area.

The following table shows the factory preset component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each area.

Remote Control Code Default Settings

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.

In this case, try to set other YAMAHA remote control code(s).

1 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to set up.

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“SETUP” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press j / i. You can set a different

type of component.

Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD,

L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*,

L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR

• The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “ID1” to

operate this unit. However, you can switch between the

following two codes if necessary.

The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “ID1”.

When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be

able to operate the other components simultaneously with the

default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes

to operate this unit separately

Setting remote control codes

Input area

Component

CATEGORY

SEARCH MODE

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

FM/AM

XIM

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

OPTIMIZER MIC A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING/CH h

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

1,4 2

1,3

(U.S.A. model)

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

While holding

down, press

PROGRAM

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STANDBY

/ON

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By

using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with previously unheard of

excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with

“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround

software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-

channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1

center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels

(instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro

Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also

available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie

mode.

■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode

for movies and a Game mode for games.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/

24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video for music programs and motion picture

soundtracks on DVD-video.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation

of DTS digital surround in your home. This system

produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound

(technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround

channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a

total of 5.1-channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES

decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding

the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.

GLOSSARY

Audio formats

100

GLOSSARY

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed

for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually

measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any surround speakers by

using virtual surround speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

■ ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering

purposes.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

Sound field programs Audio information

101

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P

and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in order

to use the component signal for output.

■ Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the

S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss

and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

Video signal information

SPECIFICATIONS

102

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................100 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China, Korea and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 Ω .......................................................135/170/200/245 W

• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ......................................................150 W

• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................110 W

• Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................120 or more

• Frequency Response

CD terminal to Front L/R ..................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ...... 0.02% or less

CD, etc. to Front L/R

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................ 0.06% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

Phono (5 mV) to REC OUT

[U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................... 81 dB or more

[Other models] ...................................................... 86 dB or more

CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ............... 100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R .............................................................. 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO (shorted) to Front L/R ................. 60 dB/55 dB or more

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ........ 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz

BASS Turnover Frequency ...............................................350 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/20 kHz

TREBLE Turnover Frequency .........................................3.5 kHz

• Phones Output ......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

PHONO ................................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kΩ

CD, etc. ................................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ

MULTI CH INPUT .............................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level/Output Impedance

REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT ....................................................................2 V/1.2 kΩ

SUB WOOFER .......................................................... 4 V/1.7 kΩ

ZONE 2 OUTPUT

[U.S.A., Canada, Australia and

Europe models] ................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ......................................................... PAL/NTSC

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................... 50 dB or more

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-video ................................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ............................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION*

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[General model] ....................... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ........................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ...................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response ........................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION*

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 530 to 1710 kHz

[General model] ................................ 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] .................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ........................................................... 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] .............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[China model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[General model] ............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 400 W/500 VA

[Other models] .................................................................. 440 W

• Standby Power Consumption .................................... 0.1 W or less

• AC Outlets

[U.K. and Australia models] ............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)

[U.S.A., Canada and China models]... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Europe and General models]............... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 420 mm

(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 16-1/2”)

• Weight ............................................................ 12.5 kg (27 lbs 9 oz)

*Except Europe model

SPECIFICATIONS

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

RX-V757

Printed in Malaysia WE59930

RX-V757

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

01EN_RX-V757_U-cv_version1.fm Page 1 Friday, December 24, 2004 4:29 PM

Transcripción de documentos

01EN_RX-V757_U-cv_version1.fm Page 1 Friday, December 24, 2004 4:29 PM U RX-V757 RX-V757 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WE59930 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord and outdoor antenna from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: Asia model ..................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ........................... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. iii Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................56 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 56 For music sources .................................................... 58 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11 Speaker placement ................................................... 11 Speaker connections ................................................ 12 Before connecting components................................ 15 Connecting video components................................. 16 Connecting audio components................................. 19 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 21 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 23 Turning on the power............................................... 23 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 24 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 59 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 59 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 60 SET MENU ............................................................61 Using SET MENU................................................... 63 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 64 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 69 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 71 ADVANCED SETUP MENU...............................73 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................75 Control area ............................................................. 75 Setting remote control codes ................................... 76 Controlling other components ................................. 78 Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 79 Changing source names in the display window....... 80 Clearing function sets .............................................. 81 Clearing individual functions .................................. 82 ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) ..................83 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Introduction.............................................................. 24 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 24 Starting the setup ..................................................... 25 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................59 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................ 10 Zone 2 connections .................................................. 83 Remote controlling Zone 2 ...................................... 84 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Basic operations....................................................... 30 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32 Selecting input modes.............................................. 37 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......86 FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 39 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................88 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................93 RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........98 GLOSSARY...........................................................99 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING .................. 45 Audio formats .......................................................... 99 Sound field programs............................................. 100 Audio information ................................................. 100 Video signal information ....................................... 101 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION What is XM Satellite Radio? ................................... 45 XM Satellite Radio connections .............................. 45 XM Satellite Radio functions .................................. 46 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 47 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 48 XM Satellite Radio search modes............................ 49 Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels ............ 52 ADVANCED OPERATION Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 39 Presetting stations .................................................... 40 Selecting preset stations........................................... 42 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 43 What is a sound field ............................................... 86 Changing parameter settings ................................... 86 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................102 RECORDING ....................................................... 55 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 100 W + 100 W Center: 100 W Surround: 100 W + 100 W Surround back: 100 W + 100 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ A SET MENU that provides you with items for optimizing this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-video → Component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and “learning” capability ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/ Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) XM Satellite Radio ◆ XM Satellite Radio programming (using the “XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory”, sold separately) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. 2 GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna Optimizer microphone LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China and General models) DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU Indoor FM antenna (Europe, Australia and Korea models) MUTE MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 0 MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 8 NIGHT 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ / –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 (U.S.A. model) VOLUME ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E NEXT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL CATEGORY INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA A B CD E F G H I J K L 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 24). 3 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT, CATEGORY* Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is not in tuner mode. 4 (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) 6 PRESET/TUNING/ CH* l / h, LEVEL –/+ Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode. 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO), DISPLAY* Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off). 9 VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS B SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT), SEARCH MODE* Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (LEVEL) between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. ■ U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only L ZONE ON/OFF buttons MAIN Switches this unit’s operation to control the component in the main room (see page 84). ZONE 2 Switches this unit’s operation to control the component in the second room (Zone 2) (see page 84). * Available only when the unit is in the XM Satellite Radio mode (see page 45). D STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. E FM/AM, XM* Switches the reception band when the unit is in tuner mode. F PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust the bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). G TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and right, center, presence and subwoofer channels (see page 31). H INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37). I INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. J MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). K PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 35). 5 INTRODUCTION A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 75. 1 2 3 TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 5 6 SELECT B C D E F G H POWER TV AV I AUDIO J REC DISC SKIP VOL 7 8 9 0 A LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT K L A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 9 0 M N EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 8 NIGHT 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 4 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 5 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. 6 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. POWER AMP 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. O 7 LEVEL, BAND Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. Switches the reception band when the unit is in tuner mode. 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i /ENTER Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or SET MENU items. Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. Press u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when the unit is in tuner mode. 9 RETURN, MEMORY* Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the SET MENU parameters. 0 Sound field program/numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the unit is in tuner mode. Use SELECT to playback 2-channel sources in multiple channel format (see page 34). Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 33). Use PURE DIRECT to turn on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 35). A SPEAKERS A/B Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminal on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. B RE-NAME Use to change the input source name in the display window (see page 80). 6 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS D LEARN Use to set up manufacturer codes or program functions from other remote controls (see pages 76 and 79). E SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM PRESET/TUNING EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT XIM SEARCH MODE SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT G MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). AUTO/MAN'L MONO DISPLAY INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON F INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 37). TUNING MODE CATEGORY PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 30 30 RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER Approximately 6 m (20 ft) STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 CD-R DVD SELECT POWER POWER AMP AV TV REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE BAND TV INPUT CH SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL TV MUTE ENTER PRESET SRCH MODE CH A-E/CAT. PRESET ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY STEREO 1 EFFECT MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 5 6 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 0 8 NIGHT +10 ENT. CHP/INDEX H SELECT k/n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. I AMP Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to control the main unit. J VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. K MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperatures – dusty places L SET MENU, SRCH MODE* Activates the SET MENU function. M ON SCREEN Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD) this unit sends to your video monitor. N STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. O NIGHT, ENT.* Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 35). * Available only when the unit is in the XM Satellite Radio mode (see page 45). 7 INTRODUCTION C CLEAR Use to clear functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, or setting remote control codes (see page 81). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 t 2 96 24 DVR/VCR2 q PL PCM D VCR1 4 5 V-AUX 6 DTV/CBL 7 DVD STANDARD ZONE2 NIGHT q PL 89 MD/CD-R 0A TUNER B CD C PHONO YPAO HD AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME VIRTUAL SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE q DIGITAL q EX 3 SP AB HiFi DSP PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP dB ft 96/24 q PL x mS dB E F GH I J L C R LFE SL SB SR K LM N O (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models only) 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. 0 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 2 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 36). A MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored. 3 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 31). 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 5 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 6 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 7 YPAO indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. 8 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in automatic tuning mode. 9 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. 8 B MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. C VOLUME level indication Indicates the current volume level. D PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. E STANDARD Lights up when a decoder is selected (see page 34). F NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. G SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. H Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. I HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. J Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS K SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. INTRODUCTION L 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. M LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. ■ U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe model only O ZONE 2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 power is on. 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 2 3 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB 9 TUNER Y 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT DVD AUDIO 5 6 7 8 AUDIO GND AM ANT DTV /CBL PHONO DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R GND VIDEO CD XM MONITOR OUT DVD PRE OUT CENTER OPTICAL IN DTV/ CBL (PLAY) CONTROL OUT OUT IN (REC) OUT VCR 1 FRONT DVD FRONT SWITCHED IN MD /CD-R MD/CD-R AC OUTLETS REMOTE SINGLE SURROUND SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 SPEAKERS OUT A DTV/CBL SURROUND IN DVR/ VCR 2 CD SURROUND BACK SURROUND OUT B DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT FRONT SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUTPUT CENTER SURROUND BACK VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT (U.S.A. model) 0 A B C 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 19 for details. 2 Audio component jacks See page 19 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 16 and 18 for connection information. 4 Antenna terminals (except U.K. model) See page 21 for connection information. 5 PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 13 for connection information. 6 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) See page 83 for details. 7 XM jack See page 45 for connection information. 8 CONTROL OUT jack (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. 10 D 9 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 22). 0 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details. A MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. B ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) These jacks output analog signals only. See page 83 for details. TUNER INPUT jacks (U.K. model only) C PRE OUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. D Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. ■ General models only VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 22 for details. SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement ITU-R* The speaker layout below shows the standard speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). PR C FR FL 30˚ Subwoofer SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 56). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 11 PREPARATION PL The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. 3 4 5 CAUTION • If you will use 4 or 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 4 ohms before using (see page 23). • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 3 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 10 mm (3/8") 1 1 2 2 ■ Banana plug connections 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of insulation from the end of each speaker cable. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Unscrew the knob. 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (With the exception of U.K. and Europe models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug (With the exception of U.K. and Europe models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 12 SPEAKER SETUP Subwoofer system Presence speakers Right Left 1 2 3 Surround speakers Right Left 4 5 PREPARATION PRE OUT FRONT SURROUND CENTER SINGLE SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 SPEAKERS A SURROUND B FRONT CENTER SURROUND BACK (U.S.A. model) 6 7 Front speakers (B) 8 10 9 Center speaker Right Left Surround back speakers Right Left Front speakers (A) You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 13 SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals Connect one or two speaker systems (6, 7) to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to the FRONT A or B terminals. ■ CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker (8) to these terminals. 2 ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals. 3 6 8 ■ SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (1), such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers (9, 10) to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers (2, 3) to these terminals. * If you are using either the U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. or Europe model, you can also use these speakers as Zone 2 speakers (see page 72). 14 7 1 5 Speaker layout 4 10 9 CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. ■ Video jacks For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO jacks. When VIDEO CONV. is set to ON (see page 71), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y PVR component video cables PVB V Y ■ Analog jacks You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jacks For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO Note S VIDEO This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. VIDEO Only when VIDEO CONV. is set to ON (see page 71). Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. 15 PREPARATION ■ Cable indications CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Note Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit if VIDEO CONV. (see page 71) is set to OFF. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections. (Even when V CONV. is set to OFF, S-video signals input from your video source component are automatically converted to composite signals in this unit.) Coaxial out Optical out Video out DVD player Audio out C O R L V PR S COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB PB Y Y DVD AUDIO VIDEO Video in MONITOR OUT DVD DVD DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT (U.S.A. model) 16 Video monitor CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND, left and right SURROUND BACK and SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) FRONT SURROUND SURROUND PREPARATION FRONT SURROUND BACK SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT R L Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Front out Multi-format player/ External decoder CENTER MULTI CH INPUT Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Surround out Front out Multi-format player/ Surround External decoder back out Surround out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output. 17 CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Notes • Be sure to connect your video source components in the same way you connect your video monitor to this unit if VIDEO CONV. (see page 71) is set to OFF. For example, if you connect your video monitor to this unit using a VIDEO connection, connect your video source components to this unit using the VIDEO connections. • Converted video signals are only output to MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording, you must make the same type of video connections (i.e., S-video) between each component. Video out Optical out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out O R V L PR S PB Y (U.S.A. model) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y AUDIO DTV/ CBL VIDEO Video in MONITOR OUT Video monitor DTV/ CBL IN VCR 1 OUT DTV/CBL COAXIAL VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT DIGITAL INPUT R L R L V Audio in Audio out or S V or S Video in DVD recorder or VCR Video out VIDEO AUX ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S-video out 18 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components Turntable GND Audio out AUDIO PREPARATION R L AUDIO PHONO DIGITAL OUTPUT Optical in MD/CD-R GND Audio out CD L O R Optical out OPTICAL O Audio out CD player IN (PLAY) MD/ CD-R MD/CD-R OUT (REC) L MD recorder or tape deck R L R Coaxial out Audio in C CD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) ■ Connecting a turntable y PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 19 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, do not make connections to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signals output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see page 72), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. 1 23 4 PRE OUT FRONT SURROUND CENTER SINGLE SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK 5 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SURROUND BACK PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding speaker terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker levels” on page 60). • Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 64) and LFE/BASS OUT (see page 65) settings. 20 CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. ■ FREQUENCY STEP (General model only) Be sure to set the frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 73). Notes Indoor FM antenna (included) AM loop antenna (included) 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. 21 PREPARATION TUNER • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord ■ Memory back-up Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models ................................... 1 outlet Korea model ..............................................................None Other models ........................................................2 outlets Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s) supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. For information on the maximum power (total power consumption of components), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 102. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: Asia model ......................... 220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ..... 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model) 22 CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. CAUTION If you are using 4 or 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 4 or 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power. Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT 1 Turn off the power to this unit, and while holding down STRAIGHT (EFFECT), press STANDBY/ON. This unit turns on, and “SP IMP.” appears in the front panel display. SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1 STRAIGHT While holding down, press STANDBY /ON TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR 1 POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SP IMP. 2 LEARN SYSTEM EFFECT SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to select “4 Ω MIN”. 1 STRAIGHT Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. EFFECT SYSTEM STANDBY /ON 3 or POWER Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power. Front panel Remote control STANDBY /ON 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. The setting you made is reflected the next time this unit’s power is turned on. 23 PREPARATION (U.S.A. model) AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) OPTIMIZER MIC Notes PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM A/B/C/D/E NEXT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL CATEGORY PROGRAM • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 28. PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE STANDBY /ON EFFECT SILENT CINEMA YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. WIRING: Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. SIZE: Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the crossover/high cut frequency for the subwoofer to improve the sound relationship between the speakers and the subwoofer. DISTANCE: Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the delay of each channel so that the sound from each speaker reaches the listening position at the same time. Also checks the phase of each speaker. EQUALIZING: Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. LEVEL: Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 24 Notes • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 5 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press u / d to select SETUP, then press j / i to select the desired setting. 1 AUTO:MENU y p If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME RELOAD MIN MAX MAX MIN Subwoofer UNDO 1 Switch on this unit and your video monitor. Make sure the OSD is displayed. 2 Press AMP. DEFAULT y You can choose RELOAD or UNDO only if you have already performed the auto setup procedure. AMP 6 3 To perform the auto setup procedure (YPAO). To reload the last auto setup (YPAO) settings to override any manual changes. To undo the last auto setup (YPAO) and restore the previous settings. To restore the factory preset (default) setup parameters. Press SET MENU. Press d to select “START”, then press ENTER to start the setup procedure. The screen changes as follows. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE y When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items (see page 60). 1 AUTO:MENU SETUP;;; ;;;;;;;AUTO . START p 4 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP, then press ENTER. p Automatic processing of all items [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start PRESET/CH SET MENU TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH 2 AUTO:CHECK .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP ;SIGNAL INFO. TV VOL p p RESULT:EXIT PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH p .WARNING (3) RESULT SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .>SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p TV VOL p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter INITIALZING . WIRING .SIZE/DISTANCE .EQUALIZING .LEVEL CHECK CH=CENTER |||||;;;;;;;; []:Exit 25 PREPARATION AUTO p . SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START Automatic processing of all items [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select AUTO SETUP The results displayed in the RESULT:EXIT screen are as follows: SP DIST y You can display the detailed result information by using d and ENTER to select “RESULT”. In the detailed result information screen, you can switch information by pressing u / d / j / i. 7 Press j / i to select SET or CANCEL, then press ENTER to return to the SET MENU screen. RESULT:EXIT SET CANCEL p p WARNING (3) RESULT SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .>SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter To apply the auto setup (YPAO) settings. To cancel the auto setup (YPAO) without making any changes. y If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page 52). Notes • If E-10 appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. • To cancel the auto setup procedure before completion, press u. 26 ERROR .E-9:USER CANCEL . .Don't operate .any function. .>RETRYEXIT []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter RETRY EXIT p • If you selected AUTO in step 5, “WAITING” appears when the auto setup procedure is started, then loud test tones are output from each speaker in turn. • If you selected DEFAULT, RELOAD or UNDO in step 5, no test tones are output. • If an ERROR screen appears, see “If an error screen appears” on page 26. • If a WARNING screen appears, see “If a warning screen appears” on page 27. Use u / d / j / i to select RETRY or EXIT, then press ENTER. p LVL The number of connected speakers displayed in the order: Front/Back/Subwoofer The distance of the speakers from this unit displayed in the order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance The speaker output level displayed in the order: Lowest output level/Highest output level ■ If an error screen appears To retry the auto setup procedure. To exit auto setup. AUTO SETUP ■ If a warning screen appears 1 Press ENTER to display detailed information about the warning. Press j / i to switch between warning messages. RESULT:EXIT p p .WARNING (3) RESULT SP : 5/4/0.1 DIST: 10.0/ 12.0ft LVL : -9.0/ +6.5dB .>SET CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter PREPARATION WARNING:W-1 .<OUT OF PHASE> .Reverse Channel .FL __ .CENTER .PL PR .SL SR .SBL SBR [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return W-1 example screen For details about each message, see page 29. y • Warnings let you know about potential problems detected during auto setup. Warnings will not cancel the auto setup. • The number of warnings is displayed to the right of “WARNING”. • When the warning is not applicable to a speaker, “– –” is displayed. 2 When you are finished, press ENTER to return to the RESULT:EXIT screen. Continue from step 7 on page 26. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate your system. • Depending on listening environments, SWFR PHASE:REV appears in AUTO:CHECK and SUBWOOFER PHASE parameter in the SETMENU (see page 66) is automatically set to REVERSE. To select the desired setting, change the SUBWOOFER PHASE parameter in the SETMENU. • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. 27 AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. Errors during auto setup Error message Cause Remedy E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A/B. • Check the front left and right speaker connections. • Turn on the power to the external amplifier (when the front speaker signals are output from an external amplifier). E-2:NO SURR. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E-3:NO PRES. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. • Try the auto setup procedure in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners (etc.) or move them away from the optimizer microphone. E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). • Check the surround speaker connections. E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Do not touch the optimizer microphone during the auto setup procedure. E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E-9:USER CANCEL The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to user activity. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not adjust VOLUME (etc.) during the auto setup procedure. E-10:INTERNAL ERROR A DSP communication error or hangup occurred. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. 28 AUTO SETUP Warnings after auto setup Press j / i to display detailed information about individual warnings. Warning message Remedy W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ / –). W-2:OVER 24m The distance between the speaker and the listening position is 24 m (80 ft) or more. • Move the speaker closer to the listening position. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ / –). W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ / –). • Use speakers of similar quality and efficiency. If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again. If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made. If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 29 PREPARATION • • • • Cause PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 4 (U.S.A. model) INPUT VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO STRAIGHT A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES Select the input source. Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Front panel 1 3 7 4 6 REC TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN 1 4 STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VOL PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MUTE DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER MENU CD PHONO VOLUME TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT SP A dB A-E/CAT. CH CH TV MUTE ENTER ON SCREEN L RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY POWER POWER TV AV R STRAIGHT TV VOL SELECT 3 The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. 6 AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER Remote control AMP REC EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 Selected input source Input mode 8 NIGHT 0 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX 3 1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. 3 or Remote control Press SPEAKERS A or B (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. AMP SPEAKERS B A A SPEAKERS B or 30 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. POWER Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Front panel 6 or Front panel 2 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operating instructions for the component. VOLUME SYSTEM STANDBY /ON 5 9 0 Remote control Front panel VOL Remote control PLAYBACK ■ To adjust the tone 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons) to select a sound field program. See page 56 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM Front panel You can adjust the tonal quality of your front left and right, center, and subwoofer speakers or headphones (when connected). Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease. • Select TREBLE to adjust the high frequency response. • Select BASS to adjust the low frequency response. TONE CONTROL PROGRAM y or Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. STEREO AMP MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 ENTERTAIN 3 0 4 Notes EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE 8 NIGHT 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. The MUTE indicator blinks in the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. MUTE y You can adjust the muting level (see page 68). • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or the 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. 31 BASIC OPERATION Remote control • TONE CONTROL is not effective during playback in the PURE DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected (page 35). • When TONE BYPASS is set to “AUTO” (page 68), and BASS and TREBLE are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses this unit's tone control circuitry. PLAYBACK ■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation MULTI CH IN or VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC Front panel PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT Remote control PHONES SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) MULTI CH INPUT Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel display. PROGRAM Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source, then select an audio source. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Audio sources Video sources Note If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source, then press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). 32 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME SP A HiFi DSP TV Sports Program name dB L R PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation PRESET/CH LEVEL ■ Enjoying multi-channel software SET MENU TITLE If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. MUTE MENU TV VOL TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT LEARN A-E/CAT. SYSTEM CH CH TV MUTE ENTER POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD STEREO 1 2 DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD STANDARD SELECT 5 6 ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT MUSIC ENTERTAIN 4 7 8 A SPEAKERS B 9 NIGHT 0 POWER TV POWER ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX SELECT AMP Sound field program buttons MOVIE 3 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback. AMP AV REC EXTD SUR. AMP AUDIO 7 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display. To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly when PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed. PRESET/CH TV VOL STEREO MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 AMP ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 CH TV MUTE ENTER CH EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 8 0 NIGHT ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME SP A HiFi DSP TV Sports dB L R Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/ 24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field programs will be applied. Auto (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. Decoders (select with j / i) You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. Off (OFF) Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels. y When “SUR. B SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 65), the surround back channel will be output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 33 BASIC OPERATION TV VOL A SPEAKERS B 9 PLAYBACK When you select the SUR. STANDARD program: Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder (PLIIx Movie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is pressed in the following cases: – When “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 64) or “SUR. B L/R SP” (see page 65) is set to NONE. – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When “2ch Stereo” or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to AUTO. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 65). • PLIIxMovie cannot be selected when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 65). ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STANDARD on the remote control to switch between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR. ENHANCED programs. STANDARD AMP 5 Or press MOVIE to select the MOVIE THEATER program. MOVIE 4 PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. When you select the SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE THEATER program: PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. y Press SELECT on the remote control to select the decoder. SELECT 6 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. 34 You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message display. Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 59). PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (PURE DIRECT) PURE DIRECT allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and DSP processors, and turn off the video circuitry and front panel display to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press PURE DIRECT on the remote control) to activate pure direct. The indicator around the front panel button lights up. ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press NIGHT repeatedly on the remote control to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. NIGHT AMP PURE DIRECT AMP or Front panel PURE DIRECT ENT. 8 Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press j / i to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. Notes PRESET/CH • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting SET MENU parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select MIN for minimum compression. • Select MID for standard compression. • Select MAX for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 35 BASIC OPERATION To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. CHP/INDEX PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multichannel sources. In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. Press STRAIGHT to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT PROGRAM AMP or Front panel STRAIGHT or STEREO EFFECT EFFECT 1 Front panel Remote control Remote control STRAIGHT y Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP 2ch Stereo Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to NONE (see page 64), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 64) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 36 PLAYBACK Notes Selecting input modes • When playing a DTS-CD/LD, be sure to set the INPUT MODE to DTS. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player depending on the player. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. 1 Rotate INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. ■ Displaying information about the input source You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. INPUT PHONO MULTI CH IN A B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel 2 1 Select the input source. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Remote control Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. DVR/VCR2 VCR1 STRAIGHT EFFECT Remote control V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L Input source AUTO DTS ANALOG Press STRAIGHT. INPUT MODE or Front panel BASIC OPERATION 2 INPUT MODE STRAIGHT R Input mode Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate decoder. y You can adjust the default input mode of this unit (see page 70). 37 PLAYBACK 3 Press u / d to display the following information about the input signal. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL (Format) in fs rate flg 38 Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”. Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 3 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. TUNING MODE ■ Automatic tuning (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO AUTO DISPLAY Lights up PRESET/TUNING EDIT LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL SEARCH MODE EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 4 1 3 R/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R BASIC OPERATION 3 2 TUNER AUTO TUNED SP A 1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. R/VCR2 FM/AM VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED FM or AM SP A When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. 39 FM/AM TUNING ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT AUTO/MAN'L MONO AUTO DISPLAY Disappears PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM TUNING MODE INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) 1 1 PRESET/TUNING EDIT 3 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM FM SEARCH MODE R/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD 2 MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED SP A 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to l PRESET/TUNING/CH h continue searching. LEVEL AUTO Lights up DISPLAY If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE R/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED SP A 40 FM/AM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES INPUT STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT MEMORY SILENT CINEMA MAN'L/AUTO FM (U.S.A. model) 3 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO TUNED CD MEMORY 4 2,5 PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L R 1 DVR/VCR2 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. VCR1 R When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM MEMORY Flashes Automatic preset tuning options: You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l to begin tuning toward the lower frequencies. 3 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT CATEGORY DVR/VCR2 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L R Preset group 41 BASIC OPERATION When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Tune into a station. See page 39 for tuning instructions. FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h VOLUME LEVEL OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY PHONO VOLUME SP A (U.S.A. model) dB L R 2 1 Preset number LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE 1 MENU TV VOL BAND TV INPUT SRCH MODE CH CH A-E/CAT. 5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MAN'L/AUTO FM DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY PHONO VOLUME SP A dB L R TV MUTE ENTER ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN 2 DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT y When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 Press A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) (or A–E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. PRESET/CH TV VOL A/B/C/D/E 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. NEXT or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH CATEGORY TV VOL Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 42 Front panel Remote control FM/AM TUNING 2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. PRESET/CH VOLUME TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT or LEVEL CH TV MUTE ENTER MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY CH PROGRAM PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Front panel TV VOL (U.S.A. model) Remote control 2,4 DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD 1,3 1,3 Select preset station “E1”. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY SP A 3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL NEXT CATEGORY DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED CD MEMORY SP A 43 BASIC OPERATION 1 TUNED SP A FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED SP A 44 CD XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING What is XM Satellite Radio? XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the U.S. Broadcasting live daily. XM’s channel lineup includes more than 130 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 68 commercialfree music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide. XM Satellite Radio connections ■ Connecting the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory Connect the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear of this unit. (For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory). XM jack Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on page 47. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, see the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com”. XM/DT BASIC OPERATION Notes • The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii). • XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, see the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com”. Notes • For information on obtaining the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory, see the website at “http:// www.xmradio.com” or visit your local retailer that sells XM Ready products. • To ensure optimal reception of XM’s satellite signal, the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory should be placed at or near a southerly facing window with nothing obstructing its path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. 45 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Remote control functions XM Satellite Radio functions Note This section describes the functions of each control used for XM Satellite Radio tuning. The following controls are only available when the unit is in the TUNER mode. To switch to the TUNER mode, press TUNER to select TUNER as input source. ■ Front panel functions TV AV REC AUDIO Note DISC SKIP VOL The following controls are only available when the unit is in the TUNER mode and the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory is connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit (For details, see “XM Satellite Radio connections”). PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SEARCH MODE XM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO 1 2 3 LEVEL LEVEL DISPLAY 4 SET MENU MUTE MENU 5 TV VOL SRCH MODE A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN EFFECT MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 ENTERTAIN 3 0 MOVIE 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 8 NIGHT +10 ENT. CHP/INDEX 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 SEARCH MODE Switches between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes. (For details, see “XM Satellite Radio search modes” on page 49) 2 XM Switches the reception band between AM, FM and XM. 3 CATEGORY (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category to next one (while staying in the All Channel Search mode). (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category to next one. (Preset Search mode) Switches between five preset groups (A to E). 4 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (All Channel Search mode) Searches a radio channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches a radio channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset number (1 to 8). 5 MEMORY Switches the unit to the preset memory mode. 6 DISPLAY Switches XM information such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel display and on-screen display. (For details, see “Switching XM information in the front panel display” on page 48). 46 6 DISPLAY MEMORY STEREO CATEGORY PRESET/CH TITLE BAND TV INPUT 7 1 BAND Switches the reception band between the currently selected band (AM or FM) and XM. 2 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i (All Channel Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH u / d to search a radio channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH u / d to search a radio channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the preset group (A to E). Press PRESET/CH u / d to change the preset number (1 to 8). 3 MEMORY Switches the unit to the preset memory mode. 4 Numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. 5 SRCH MODE Switches between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes. (For details, see “XM Satellite Radio search modes” on page 49) 6 DISPLAY Switches XM information such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title displayed in the front panel display and on-screen display. (For details, see “Switching XM information in the front panel display” on page 48). 7 ENT. Confirms an entered channel number during the Direct Number Access mode (see page 51). XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Activating XM Satellite Radio 3 To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required. Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and then access the website at “http://activate.xmradio.com” or call “1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” with a major credit card for signing up. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select channel “0”. PRESET/CH TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL VOLUME Front panel OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SEARCH MODE XIM SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO CATEGORY Remote control DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Note You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode (see page 49) is not selected. 1 4 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display and write it down. ID:_____________________________________ INPUT TUNER or Remote control Front panel 2 Press XM (or BAND on the remote control) to select “XM” as the reception band. FM/AM LEVEL or TITLE XM BAND Front panel Remote control DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM XM RADIO Lights If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear of this unit properly. See “XM Satellite Radio connections” on page 45 and check the connection. 47 BASIC OPERATION 1 2 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Switching XM information in the front panel display Basic XM Satellite Radio operations ■ Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SPEAKERS A MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM STRAIGHT You can display XM information (such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected in the front panel display. Press DISPLAY on the unit (or remote control during the TUNER mode) repeatedly to toggle between the following channel information display modes. INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE B DISPLAY Channel name/number Front panel or Channel category ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 1 Artist name/Song title Remote control 1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. When the channel number/name is displayed: DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A INPUT XM [040] Deep Tra TUNER or When the channel category is displayed: DVR/VCR2 Remote control Front panel VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM <CAT>Rock 2 Press XM (or BAND on the remote control) to select “XM” as the reception band. Information (such as channel number/name, category, or artist name/song title) for the channel currently selected appears in the front panel display and the XM indicator lights up. FM/AM LEVEL or TITLE XM BAND Front panel Remote control When the artist name/song title is displayed: DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM Coldplay / Clo y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. If the information contains more than 14 characters, the information scrolls from right to left. • If the information contains a character that cannot be recognized by the unit, the character will be displayed with an underbar “_”. Note DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM [001] Preview Lights y • Selecting the “XM” band automatically recalls the channel previously selected. • You can change the kind of XM information by pressing DISPLAY repeatedly. (For details, see “Switching XM information in the front panel display” on page 48). Note XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output from the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 48 If a status message or an error message appears in the display, see “Status and error messages” on page 54. XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Displaying XM information in the onscreen display You can display XM information on a video monitor by pressing DISPLAY. It is much easier to see the available information than reading it on the front panel display. XM INFORMATION You can search for the channel you want to listen to using one of three search modes. You can also enter the number directly to select the desired channel (For details, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 51). ■ All Channel Search mode p p ALL CH SEARCH XM:040 CHAN:Deep Tracks CAT:Rock NAME:Coldplay TITLE:Clocks .(Coldplay/Clo) []/[]:CHANNEL [<]/[>]:CATEGORY XM Satellite Radio search modes PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SPEAKERS A MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE B y 2 3 1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 48. 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. SET MENU PRESET/TUNING EDIT or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel DVR/VCR2 VCR Remote control V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM ALL CH SEARCH 49 BASIC OPERATION • In the SET MENU (see page 73), you can set the time for displaying XM information in the on-screen display. • When “XM DISPLAY” in the SET MENU is set to “OFF”, you cannot display XM information in the on-screen display. • If the information contains a character that cannot be recognized by the unit (on-screen display program), the character will be displayed with an underbar “_”. XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Category Search mode 3 To change the channel category, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PRESET/CH PROGRAM TV VOL SPEAKERS A STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE B A/B/C/D/E or NEXT CH CATEGORY TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Front panel 2 To search a channel within all channels, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly. 1 Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 48. 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. PRESET/CH TV VOL PRESET/TUNING EDIT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH SET MENU or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel TV VOL Front panel 3 Remote control Remote control Remote control DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL MD/CD-R DVD TUNER CD TUNED SP A y You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control). XM CAT SEARCH 3 To change the channel category, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH TV VOL A/B/C/D/E or NEXT CH CATEGORY TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Front panel Remote control To search a channel within the selected channel category, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Front panel Remote control y You can search a channel with the quick search by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control). 50 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Preset Search mode ■ Direct Number Access mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you should preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 52. All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the factory setting. TV AV REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MUTE 2 MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT A-E/CAT. PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SEARCH MODE MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO CATEGORY XM CH CH TV MUTE ENTER LEVEL DISPLAY PROGRAM ON SCREEN INPUT STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN SPEAKERS A STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE DISPLAY MEMORY B 3 EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 1 2 9 3 NIGHT 0 +10 SET MENU or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 48. 2 Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. PRESET/TUNING EDIT Remote control V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER 4 1 SET MENU or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel VCR ENT. Remote control CD TUNED SP A XM PRESET SEARCH DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A 3 To change the preset group (A to E), press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH XM ALL CH SEARCH or DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A TV VOL CAT SEARCH A/B/C/D/E or NEXT XM CH CH TV MUTE ENTER CATEGORY TV VOL Front panel Remote control To change the preset number (1 to 8), press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly. PRESET/CH TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Front panel Remote control y You can also select the preset number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. 51 BASIC OPERATION Press SEARCH MODE (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. DVR/VCR2 8 CHP/INDEX Carry out “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio mode” on page 48. PRESET/TUNING EDIT 4 7 A SPEAKERS B 2 MOVIE EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the desired channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 Setting XM Satellite Radio preset channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (eight preset numbers in five preset groups, A1 to E8). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 51. The display changes as follows. DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM <XM> --1 VCR1 V-AUX FM/AM SEARCH MODE XM A/B/C/D/E DTV/CBL DVD SP A SPEAKERS MD/CD-R TUNER V-AUX DTV/CBL DISPLAY STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM 2,5 4 3 <XM>123 Search the XM Satellite Radio channel you want to set as a preset channel. To search the desired channel, carry out “All Channel Search mode” or “Category Search mode” on page 46, or “Direct Number Access mode” on page 51. DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL MD/CD-R DVD TUNER CD TUNED If you enter fewer than three numbers you may press ENT. to tune to the channel immediately or wait a few seconds to confirm the entered channel number. ENT. y • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after entering onedigit or two-digit number, the unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than numeric buttons or ENT. cancels the direct number access procedure. SP A XM [040] Deep Tra When the channel number “040” is selected 2 Press MEMORY on the unit (or remote control during the TUNER mode). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about five seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or RETURN MEMORY Remote control Front panel MEMORY Flashes 52 AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT CD TUNED SP A 4 TUNING MODE XM 1 VCR MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL B <XM> -12 DVR/VCR2 l PRESET/TUNING/CH h CATEGORY PROGRAM A DVR/VCR2 PRESET/TUNING EDIT NEXT SP A XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 3 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) to select a preset group (A to E). The group letter appears. PRESET/CH TV VOL A/B/C/D/E or NEXT CH CH TV MUTE ENTER CATEGORY TV VOL Front panel DVR/VCR2 Remote control VCR DTV/CBL V-AUX MD/CD-R DVD TUNER CD TUNED SP A C MEMORY XM [040] Deep Preset group 4 BASIC OPERATION While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select a preset number (1 to 8). PRESET/CH TV VOL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h or LEVEL CH CH TV MUTE ENTER TV VOL Remote control Front panel DVR/VCR2 VCR DTV/CBL V-AUX MD/CD-R DVD TUNER TUNED SP A CD MEMORY XM C5 [040] Deep Preset number 5 While the MEMORY indicator is flashing, press MEMORY on the unit (or the remote control) to preset the selected XM Satellite Radio channel. A colon appears next to the preset number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or RETURN MEMORY Remote control Front panel DVR/VCR2 VCR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A XM C5:[040] Deep Colon appears Note Presetting a new channel clears the former preset channel stored in the same preset group and number. 53 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Status and error messages If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Message Cause Remedy CHECK ANTENNA The XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory is not connected, or does not work properly. • Check the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory connections. UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. • Wait until the encryption code is updated. NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. • Check the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory connections and orient it for the best reception. LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. • Wait until the decoding process has finished. OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signal. • Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. <XM> - - - The channel station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name/feature or song/program title is available. / - - - <CAT> - - - 54 No channels are available for the selected category. • Select another channel category by pressing CATEGORY (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES INPUT STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) 1 2 TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM 1 POWER STANDBY INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 SELECT 1 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. 55 BASIC OPERATION SLEEP Notes • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 66) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 37) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.1 Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on page 32 to 36. Remote control button Program Features 1 STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel (left and right) or plays back 2-channel sources as is. 2 MUSIC: POP/ROCK This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. Sources ENTERTAINMENT: Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching TV Sports various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. 3 ENTERTAINMENT: This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence Mono Movie sound field. ENTERTAINMENT: This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. Game MOVIE THEATER: CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and Spectacle the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic Sci-Fi 4 space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be Adventure similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. General 56 MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Remote control button Program Features SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 5 Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 57 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on page 32 to 36. Remote control button Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2-channel (left and right) playback. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC: Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC: The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. MUSIC: The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 2-CH 1 2 3 5 58 Sources MULTI 2-CH MULTI 2-CH ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS Selecting the OSD mode Using the sleep timer You can display this unit’s operating information on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short display, and display off. Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 ON SCREEN DISPLAY SELECT Full display Always shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. POWER POWER TV AV AMP Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. Display off Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU, even if the OSD mode is set to “Display off”. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. P04 MOVIE THEATER SLEEP 120min P04MOVIETHEATER General Full display Short display SLEEP OFF DVR/VCR2 SLEEP 90min SLEEP 30min VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD SLEEP 60min MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A HiFi DSP PHONO VOLUME SLEEP dB L R Notes • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “DISPLAY SET” (see page 71). • When using component video signals, the “Short display” is not output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. To display the OSD with component video signal input, set the OSD mode to “Full Display” while GRAY BACK in DISPLAY SET (see page 71) is set to AUTO. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. SLEEP indicator DVR/VCR2 VCR1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED SP A TV Sports PHONO VOLUME SLEEP dB L R 59 ADVANCED OPERATION .General DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;15ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 SLEEP ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. SLEEP SLEEP OFF Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24), “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 66). y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL 2 LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN 4 STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY EFFECT 3 1 Press AMP. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR.R SUR.L SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SWFR PRES.L PRES.R Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround left speaker level Surround back right speaker level Surround back left speaker level Subwoofer level Presence left speaker level Presence right speaker level y Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. 4 Press ENTER when you have completed your adjustment. y This operation can also be performed using the controls on the front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level. 60 SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ AUTO SETUP Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 24). ■ MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. y Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). You can use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. Item Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 64 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 66 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 67 D)EQUALIZER Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 67 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 68 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 68 G)AUDIO SET Customizes the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 68 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. Item Features Page 69 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 70 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. 70 D)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 70 ADVANCED OPERATION A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 61 SET MENU 3 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. Item Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 71 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 71 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 72 D)MULTI ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals or selects how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. 72 E)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level for the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory. 72 ■ SIGNAL INFO Use to check audio Signal information (see page 37). 62 SET MENU Using SET MENU 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. Press ENTER to enter MANUAL SETUP. 1 SOUND MENU appears on the front panel display. ;MANUAL SETUP PRESET/CH TV VOL POWER POWER TV 1 AMP AV CH REC TV MUTE ENTER .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3OPTIONMENU CH AUDIO VOL p p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter DISC SKIP TV VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE 2,8 MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT 3-7 A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 0 8 NIGHT 10 5 Press u / d to select the desired menu. 6 Press ENTER to enter the selected menu. ENT. CHP/INDEX 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 PRESET/CH TV VOL y You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode. 1 TV MUTE ENTER CH p Note CH p • You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. • If you press a sound field program button during SET MENU operation, the SET MENU is canceled. .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)EQUALIZER []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter TV VOL 7 Press u / d and ENTER to select the submenu, then press u / d to select the item and j / i to change the parameter. Press AMP. B)SPEAKER LEVEL AMP -+ .FL FR C 2 Press SET MENU. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Press u / d to select MANUAL SETUP. PRESET/CH SET MENU TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION 3 • Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting. • To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN. CH ;AUTOSETUP .;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO. 8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. SET MENU p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p TV VOL MENU SRCH MODE Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. 63 SET MENU 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)EQUALIZER []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: LRG, SML, NONE CENTER SP NONE)SMLLRG • Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP Choices: LRG, SML, NONE SUR. L/R SP FRONT SP NONE)SMLLRG SMALL)LARGE • Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. 64 • Select LRG if you have large surround left and right speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select SML if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 36) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SUR. B L/R SP) to NONE. SET MENU Surround back speakers SUR. B L/R SP Choices: LRGx1, LRGx2, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE SUR. B L/R SP Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers according to the characteristics of your system. This setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH SMLx1)SMLx2 • Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select NONE if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select SMLx1 or LRGx1, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Presence speakers Choices: YES, NONE PRESENCE SP LFE/BASS OUT SWFRFRNT)BOTH • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. • Select FRNT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front speakers according to the speaker settings (even if you have previously set front speakers to SML). • Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want to output low-frequency signals from front channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and lowfrequency signals from other channels are also directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs. PRESENCE SP CROSS OVER )NONEYES FREQ;;;80Hz • Select YES if you have presence speakers. • Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers. y When YES is selected, the unit automatically adjusts the dialog lift parameter. To adjust it manually, see page 92. 65 ADVANCED OPERATION Cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz SET MENU Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker level of each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 64). Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial Setting: 0 dB 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE B)SPEAKER LEVEL -+ .FL FR C )NORMALREVERSE • Select NORMAL if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. Presence/Surround back channel priority PRIORITY You can select to prioritize either the surround back or presence speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRch, SBch PRIORITY p p PRch )SBch • Select PRch to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. 66 • • • • • • • • • • * FL adjusts the balance of the front left speaker. FR adjusts the balance of the front right speaker. C adjusts the balance of the center speaker. SL adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker. SR adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker. SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround back left speaker. SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround back right speaker. SWFR adjusts the balance of the subwoofer. PL adjusts the balance of the presence left speaker. PR adjusts the balance of the presence right speaker. Instead of SBL and SBR, SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SUR. B L/R SP (page 65). SET MENU ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. C)SP DISTANCE p p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft) Other models: meters (m) • Select meters to input speaker distances in meters. • Select feet to input speaker distances in feet. Center graphic equalizer CENTER GEQ When CNTR GEQ is selected, use this feature to output a test tone and adjust the tonal quality so that it matches that of the front left speaker. You can adjust 5 frequency bands: 100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz Choices: –6 to +6 dB Initial setting: 0 dB D)EQUALIZER .TEST)OFFON -+ 100Hz0dB 300Hz0dB 1kHz0dB 3kHz0dB 10kHz0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p • Select ON to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the currently selected source component. • Press u / d to select a frequency band. • Press j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. ADVANCED OPERATION * Equalizer EQ TYPE SELECT Select to change the type of equalizer used by this unit. Choices: AUTO PEQ, CNTR GEQ, EQ OFF • Select AUTO PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in auto setup. • Select CNTR GEQ to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front left and right speakers. • Select EQ OFF to cancel equalizing. p Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SUR. L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SUR. R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SB L* adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SB R* adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) ■ Center graphic equalizer D)EQUALIZER Use this feature to select the parametric (AUTO PEQ) or graphic equalizer (CNTR GEQ). Instead of SB L and SB R, SUR. B will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SUR. B L/R SP (page 65). 67 SET MENU ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use to customize this units overall audio settings. G)AUDIO SET .MUTING TYPE;;FULL AUDIODELAY;;0ms TONE BYPASS;;AUTO p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE LEVEL”, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) F)DYNAMIC RANGE .SP:MINSTD)MAX HP:MINSTD)MAX p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speaker SP Select to adjust the speaker compression. Headphone HP Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. 68 Muting type MUTING TYPE Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select FULL to completely halt all output of sound. • Select –20dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 ms Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use to select whether audio output bypasses tone control circuitry when TREBLE and BASS are set to 0 dB (see page 31). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select AUTO if you want signals to bypass tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select OFF if you do not want signals to bypass tone control circuitry. SET MENU For OPTICAL INPUT jack 2 (OPTICAL IN (2)), 3 (OPTICAL IN (3)) and 4 (OPTICAL IN (4)) 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. 2 INPUTMENU p p .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)VOLUME TRIM []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Choices: (2) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 (3) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 (4) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 OPTICALIN .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 (COAXIAL IN (5)) and 6 (COAXIAL IN (6)) Choices: (5) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 (6) PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (CMPNT-V INPUT [A]) and B (CMPNT-V INPUT [B]) Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 CMPNT-VINPUT .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) COAXIALIN .(5);;;;; CD ( CD ) (6);;;;; DVD (DVD ) Notes For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OPTICAL OUT (1)) Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 OPTICALOUT .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) 69 ADVANCED OPERATION • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. SET MENU ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE ■ Volume Trim D) VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 37 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input to each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: PHONO, CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/ CBL, V-AUX, VCR1, DVR/VCR2 B)INPUTMODE )AUTOLAST [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button will not be recalled. ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the OSD and front panel display. C)INPUTRENAME DVD->DVD p p [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press u / d to select the character you want, then use j / i to move to the next space. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, -, +, etc.) 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each input. 6 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. 70 SET MENU 3 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. 3 OPTIONMENU p p .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)MULTI ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET A)DISPLAYSET p p .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEOCONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAYBACK;;;AUTO CMPNTOSD;;;;;ON []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:sELECT Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 Notes • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (i.e., S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Notes • When only the component video signals are input, the OSD is not displayed if GRAY BACK is set to OFF. To display the OSD with component video signal input, set GRAY BACK to AUTO while the OSD mode (see page 59) is set to “Full Display”. • When video signals are not being input, set GRAY BACK to AUTO to display the OSD. Component OSD CMPNT OSD Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when using the SET MENU. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Note SET MENU functions even when OFF is selected. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORYGUARD )OFFON [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals from the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF not to convert any signals. (except S-video signals to composite signals) • Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. • Regardless of the setting, S-video signals are always converted to composite signals. Gray back GRAY BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Select ON to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Note When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) • Press + to lower the position of the OSD. • Press – to raise the position of the OSD. 71 SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. Choices: An asterisk (*) appears next to program numbers that have been changed from their initial settings. Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STANDAND Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP (U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models only) Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. Choices: INT, EXT D)MULTI ZONESET .SPB;;;;;;;;FRONT ZONE2 AMP;;;;;EXT C)PARAM.INI STEREO *MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER *STANDARD Press DSP Key Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. ■ Zone set D) MULTI ZONE SET Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. D)MULTI ZONESET .SPB;;;;;;;;FRONT ZONE2 AMP;;;;;EXT [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return Speaker B setting SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select EXT if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select INT to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. ■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET XM information display time XM DISPLAY Use to set the time for displaying XM information in the on-screen display. If “10s” or “30s” is selected, xm information is displayed for 10 or 30 seconds after pressing DISPLAY. Choices: OFF, 10s, 30s, ON y When “XM DISPLAY” in the SET MENU is set to “ON”, pressing DISPLAY shows xm information until you select another input source (see page 30). XM Radio antenna XM ANT. Use to check the current reception level for the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory connected to this unit. For the best reception, orient the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory so that a value of XX% or more is displayed here. Range: NONE, 0 to 100% Note “NONE” is displayed if the XM connect and Play digital antenna accessory is not connected to this unit. If this happens, check the antenna connections (see page 45). E)XM RADIO SET XM DISPLAY;;;10S XM ANTENNA;;;75% [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return 72 ADVANCED SETUP MENU ADVANCED SETUP MENU The ADVANCED SETUP menu is displayed in the front panel display. 3 y • During the advanced setup procedure, audio output is muted. • During the advanced setup procedure, only the STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) buttons, and PROGRAM selector on the front panel are available for operation. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) repeatedly to toggle between the available parameters. STRAIGHT EFFECT CAUTION Be sure to set the speaker impedance before using this unit to play back audio or video signals. 4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. (U.S.A. model) STANDBY /ON VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM A/B/C/D/E NEXT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1,3 2 1,4 1 This completes the advanced setup procedure. The settings you made are reflected the next time this unit’s power is turned on. Turn off the power to this unit, and while holding down STRAIGHT (EFFECT), press STANDBY/ON. This unit turns on, and the ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON ADVANCED OPERATION While holding down, press EFFECT 2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu and select the item you want to set up. See the end of this section for a complete list of available parameters. PROGRAM 73 ADVANCED SETUP MENU ■ ADVANCED SETUP menu items Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use to switch the speaker impedance for this unit. Choices: 8 Ω MIN, 4 Ω MIN • Select 8 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω. • Select 4 Ω MIN to set the speaker impedance to 4 Ω. SP IMP. Speaker Front Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 4 Ω ΜΙΝ Center Surround Surround back The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front 8 Ω ΜΙΝ Center Surround Surround back • If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when SP IMP is set to the 8 Ω MIN position. Factory presets PRESET Use to reset all parameters to the factory presets (see page 98). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select CANCEL if you do not want this unit’s parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory presets. • Select RESET if you want all of this unit’s parameters to be initialized when you reset the factory presets. Note This setting does not affect ADVANCED SETUP menu item parameters. Remote REMOTE Use to switch the ID for the remote control of this unit. Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select ID1 to operate this unit using the default code. • Select ID2 to operate this unit using an alternative code. 74 Note You must also make settings for the remote control (see page 76). < Asia and General models only > Tuner TU Use to switch the frequency step selection according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • North, Central and South America: AM10/FM100 (kHz) • Other areas: AM9/FM50 (kHz) REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after pressing AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected component. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT Press AMP to control this unit. POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO The buttons in the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, INPUT MODE, MULTI CH IN, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, STRAIGHT and input selector buttons) function in any mode. DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL BAND TV INPUT SRCH MODE CH CH A-E/CAT. TV MUTE ENTER The A/B and input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...CD recorder SELECT k/n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. TRANSMIT RE-NAME STANDBY POWER B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER STRAIGHT POWER STEREO 1 2 SELECT 5 6 ENTERTAIN MOVIE 3 4 A SPEAKERS B VOLAUDIO DISC SKIP 8 NIGHT 10 LEVEL ENT. Component control area You can control up to 11 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 76). Fixing the remote to AMP mode You can fix the remote permanently to AMP mode (fixed AMP mode) so that the shaded areas above always control this unit. This is useful, if you primarily want to use the remote control in AMP mode. To fix AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds so that “A:___” appears in the display window. PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL SRCH MODE LEVEL PRESET/CH BAND TV INPUT TITLE CH TV MUTE BAND ENTER TV INPUT CH TV VOL RETURN MEMORY STEREO 1 STANDARD A:DVD REC ADVANCED OPERATION 0 DISC SKIP CHP/INDEX Fixed AMP mode AV AUDIO EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 POWER TV EFFECT STANDARD 9 REC DISPLAY MUSIC AMP AV POWER TV VOL RETURN MEMORY LEARN INPUT MODE SYSTEM A TV ON SCREEN CLEAR SLEEP 5 MENU SRCH MODE CH TV MUTESTRAIGHT ON SCREEN ENTER DISPLAY EFFECT ON SCREEN TV VOL MOVIE MUSIC ENTERTAIN RETURN DISPLAY 2 MEMORY 3 4 STEREO MUSICPUREENTERTAIN SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT 6 1 A SPEAKERS STANDARD B 9 SET MENU A-E/CAT. CHTV VOL 0 5 7 2 8 3 MOVIE 4 SELECT NIGHT EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 10 6 ENTER 7 8 CHP/INDEX A SPEAKERS B 9 0 NIGHT 10 ENT. CHP/INDEX DVD Component control mode To temporarily switch to component control mode, press AMP. To cancel fixed AMP mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds. 75 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting remote control codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. The following table shows the factory preset component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. LEARN Remote Control Code Default Settings Component category (Library) Input area Manufacturer A LD B CD-R PHONO TV – V-AUX VCR – TUNER TUNER MD/CD-R MD Yamaha-1 CD CD Yamaha-1 DTV/CBL TV – VCR – DVR Yamaha DVD DVD Yamaha-1 Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other YAMAHA remote control code(s). Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. PHONO MULTI CH IN B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. Yamaha-3 (U.K. and Europe models) Yamaha-4 (Other models) VCR 1 A y Yamaha DVR/VCR2 1 Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. Yamaha (U.K. and Europe models) Yamaha-1 (Other models) If you want to change a library (component category), press j / i. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR • The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “ID1” to operate this unit. However, you can switch between the following two codes if necessary. The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “ID1”. AMP library code (remote control setting) Function Remote control ID (this unit’s setting: see page 74) ID1 To operate this unit using the (initial setting) default code. ID1Z To operate this unit using the default code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 83). (U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Australia models only) ID2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2Z To operate this unit using an alternative code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 83). (U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Australia models only) ID1 (initial setting) ID2 When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately 76 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press u / d to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN Notes PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL 4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the manufacturer code is correct. POWER POWER TV AV • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible manufacturer codes for commercially available AV components (including YAMAHA AV components). If operation is not possible with any of the manufacturer codes, program the new remote control function with the Learn feature (see below) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button at the same time. AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE MENU TV VOL BAND TV INPUT SRCH MODE y • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you continuously want to set up a code for another component, press TV MUTE/ENTER and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. ADVANCED OPERATION 77 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 3 POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP VOL 4 5 6 LEVEL SET MENU MUTE SRCH MODE A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 9 0 7 8 NIGHT ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A *1 0 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT A SPEAKERS B 1 2 3 9 MENU TV VOL BAND TV INPUT 7 8 PRESET/CH TITLE A DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Digital TV/ Cable TV LD player CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner *4 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 REC/DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 Disc skip Rec (MD) h Play Play VCR play *3 Play Play Play ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward AUDIO Audio e Pause b Skip backward a Skip forward s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 TITLE/ TV INPUT Title TV input *2 TV MUTE/ ENTER Select TV mute *2 TV VOL + Up TV VOL – Down CH + Right VCR channel + CH – Left RETURN Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons MENU Menu DISPLAY Display ENT. Title/Index Sound Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Stop Stop Stop TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Preset up (1 – 8) TV volume – *2 TV volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Preset down (1 – 8) TV channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 Preset up (A – E) Band VCR channel – TV channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 Preset down (A – E) Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) Display Display Display Display Enter Enter Chapter/Time Index Index This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV/CBL or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. *4 The U.K. model is not equipped with the tuner reception function. *2 78 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming codes from other remote controls 3 If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control code, or an appropriate remote control code is not available, do the following. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 75). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than three seconds, the remote enters the manufacturer code setting mode. LEARN Note This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the remote control of your component.) 1 Press an input selector button to select a source component. PHONO Flashes alternately y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD MULTI CH IN INPUT MODE LEARN SLEEP CD CLEAR PHONO DVD RE-NAME STANDBY MD/CD-R TRANSMIT POWER B DVR/VCR2 SYSTEM A VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AUDIO Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. DTV/CBL REC DISC SKIP AV Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. POWER 5 VOL 2 POWER Press the button at which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. TV 4 MULTI CH IN A LEARN INPUT MODE CLEAR SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN RE-NAME STANDBY PHONO TRANSMIT POWER B MD/CD-R SYSTEM A DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER DTV/CBL TV POWER ADVANCED OPERATION LEARN INPUT MODE CLEAR SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN RE-NAME STANDBY PHONO TRANSMIT POWER B MD/CD-R SYSTEM A DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 TUNER AMP SELECT V-AUX AV POWER DTV/CBL TV POWER 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 79 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Notes • “NG” appears in the display window if programming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 120 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. Changing source names in the display window You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name to the one that is set as the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD LEARN Notes • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button at the same time. 2 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Press u / d to select and enter a character. Pressing d changes the character as follows: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash). (Pressing u changes the characters in reverse order.) PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL 4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next position. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL y If you want to continue setting up names for other components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME 80 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, renamed source names and setup manufacturer codes. 4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory preset setting. CLEAR 1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – When a button other than the cursor is pressed. – When more than one button is pressed at the same time. CLEAR y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Other wise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. 2 Press u / d to select the clear mode. L:DVD (L: name of a component) L:AMP L:ALL RNAME FCTRY 3 Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all renamed source names. Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR ADVANCED OPERATION Note “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 81 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing individual functions 4 Repeat step 3 to clear other learned functions. 5 Press LEARN again to exit. ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned in a certain programmed button in each area. 1 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. LEARN y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN A B PHONO V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD When you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory preset setting (or manufacturer setting if you have set manufacturer codes). 82 ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. You can control this unit from the second room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second room. Any source you want to listen to in the second room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room (to a CD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second room. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. OUT IN OUT IN REMOTE CONTROL OUT This unit • ■ System configuration and connections example ZONE 2 OUTPUT Amplifier This unit ADVANCED OPERATION DVD player (or other component) Remote control DVD INPUT Infrared emitter Main room REMOTE CONTROL OUT Infrared signal receiver Second room ZONE 2 REMOTE IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in the second room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 83 ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, set “ZONE2 AMP” to “INT” in SET MENU (see page 72). – + L R PRESENCE /ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2 4 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit and Zone 2. LEARN ■ To control Zone 2 y You can also turn on/off the MAIN and ZONE 2 mode by pressing MAIN or ZONE 2 on the front panel. 1 ■ To enable Zone 2 mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ to control the selected room. 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting remote control codes” on page 76. 2 Press j / i to select “L:AMP”. Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE2” in the display window. SELECT PRESET/CH 2 TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL 3 Press u / d to select “ID1Z”. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL Notes • To select the Zone feature with ID2, select “ID2Z”. • Since the Zone 2 code is common to “ID1Z” and “ID2Z”, the Zone 2 code does not change even if the AMP library code (remote control setting) is switched. 84 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 power on. ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA, AUSTRALIA AND EUROPE MODELS ONLY) ■ Turning this unit to either on or standby 3 4 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. PHONO MULTI CH IN A B V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD You can control Zone 2 using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+. REC TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR AUDIO DISC SKIP STANDBY SLEEP LCD display SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Normal mode* Name of component Turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name of component” Turns Zone 2 to on/ standby System mode “SYSTM” Turns everything (the main unit and Zone 2) on/standby * LEARN SYSTEM POWER SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone 2 mode is selected, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 to on/standby individually. • When system mode is selected, or when ID1/ID2 is selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 to on/standby all together simultaneously. INPUT MODE VOL A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD * LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MUTE “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. MENU TV VOL DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SRCH MODE BAND TV INPUT A-E/CAT. CH TV MUTE ENTER CH ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY EFFECT * If “ZONE2 AMP” in OPTION MENU is set to INT, you can use VOL –/+ to adjust sound output from speakers connected to the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (see page 72). However, VOL –/+ cannot be used to adjust sound output from the ZONE2 OUTPUT jacks. 5 Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2 mode. Notes The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS-encoded discs. For DVDs encoded in DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. ADVANCED OPERATION • “ZONE2” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and SYSTM only when n is pressed. • If you press SELECT k when the unit is set to Zone 2 mode, the unit switches to Zone 3 mode. However, this unit does not support Zone 3 mode. To exit Zone 3 mode, press SELECT n. • Since the Zone 2 code is common to “ID1Z” and “ID2Z”, the Zone 2 code does not change even if the AMP library code (remote control setting) is switched. ■ Special considerations for DTS software 85 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. ■ Elements of a sound field TRANSMIT RE-NAME CLEAR REC LEARN AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE A B PHONO MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER MD/CD-R CD LEVEL DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD BAND TV INPUT VOL If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. MUTE MENU SRCH MODE A-E/CAT. CH 5 SELECT Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. SET MENU TV VOL Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. PRESET/CH TITLE 1 POWER POWER TV AV CH TV MUTE ENTER ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY MEMORY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC 1 2 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 AMP REC ENTERTAIN 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE 3 4 2 3 8 NIGHT 0 ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX 1 Press AMP. AMP 2 3 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN DISPLAY Select the sound field program you want to adjust. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 STANDARD SELECT 5 6 4 EXTD SUR. PURE DIRECT 7 8 A SPEAKERS B 9 MOVIE NIGHT 0 ENT. 10 CHP/INDEX Program No. Program name P04 MOVIE THEATER Cursor .General DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;15ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 Parameters 86 Parameter values EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 4 ■ Resetting parameters to the factory presets Press u / d to select the parameters. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH To reset all parameters Use PARAM. INI (see page 72). TV VOL 5 Press j / i to change the parameter value. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory-set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the on-screen display. PRESET/CH TV VOL CH TV MUTE ENTER CH TV VOL y If you press and hold </> to change the parameter value, the front panel display automatically stops at the factory preset parameter momently. 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to change other program parameters. Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 71). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 87 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL (DSP level) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB to +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY/P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 to 99 msec Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 88 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS (Liveness) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 to 10 Source Sound Time Level Dead Level Level Live Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 to 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 to 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 to 10 ■ SB INI. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 to 49 msec ■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 to 2.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 to 10 89 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time) Function: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control Range: 1.0 to 5.0 sec Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections Sound Source 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation time Reverberation time 60 dB Reverberation time Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay) Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 to 250 msec Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time Reverberation delay Reverberation time ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) Level Function: Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 to 100% Source Sound Reverberation level Time 90 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 0. For 2ch Stereo: ■ DIRECT (Direct) Function: Choices: Bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors for pure high fidelity sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. AUTO, OFF Notes • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • When “BASS OUT” is set to BOTH, or “FRONT SP” set to SMALL and “BASS OUT” set to SWFR, front left and right speaker lowfrequency signals are redirected to the subwoofer. For 7ch Stereo: Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) ■ PL LEVEL (Presence left level) ■ PR LEVEL (Presence level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music: ■ PANORAMA (Panorama) Function: Choices: Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. OFF, ON ■ DIMENSION (Dimension) Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). Function: Control range: Initial setting: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers) 3 Note This parameter can be set only when SUR.STANDARD is selected. 91 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ CENTER WIDTH (Center width) SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS For DTS Neo:6 Music: ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: Initial setting: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 to 1.0 0.3 Note This parameter can be set only when SUR.STANDARD is selected. 92 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On-screen display does not appear. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 74 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 59 “GRAY BACK” in SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is currently being received. Set “GRAY BACK” to AUTO to always show the OSD. 71 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 24 The input mode is set to DTS or ANALOG. Select AUTO. 37 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) or the input selector buttons. 30 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 30 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation button of this unit to resume audio output, then adjust the volume. 31 The input mode is set to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 37 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 71 11-14 15-20 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause 93 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Remedy Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 74 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 31 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings. 66 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on. 36 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 56 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 66 “CENTER SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 64 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 56 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 66 “SUR. L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 64 A monaural source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in SUR. B L/R SP. 65 “SUR. L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. If the surround left and right speakers are set to NONE, the surround back speaker setting is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround speakers. 64 “SUR. B L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRGx1 or SMLx1. 65 “LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to FRNT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 65 “LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 65 No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. The source does not contain low bass signals. 94 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 37 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 19 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 19 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 15-19 The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 15-19 The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 71 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 95 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. There is noise when the OSD is displayed. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. Refer to page Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The OSD may be disturbed when displaying OSD through component video connections. Select OFF in CMPNT OSD. 71 The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 96 Cause Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 40 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 40 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 40 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 40 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The manufacturer code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly. 76 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer. 76 74, 76 The remote control ID and this unit’s ID do not match. Switch the library code. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 79 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 79 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 82 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 97 RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign and tuner presets. Be sure this unit is in standby mode. 4 Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. STANDBY /ON (U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM SEARCH MODE XIM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h NEXT SPEAKERS A B TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT VIDEO AUX STANDBY /ON S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1,3 2 1,4 1 With the unit in the standby mode, hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON. The ADVANCED SETUP menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT While holding down, press STANDBY /ON EFFECT y To cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON. 2 Rotate PROGRAM to move through the menu and select “PRESET”. PROGRAM 3 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the desired setting. STRAIGHT EFFECT RESET CANCEL 98 To reset the unit to its factory presets. To cancel without making any changes. If you selected “RESET”, the unit is reset to its factory presets and switches to standby mode. If you selected “CANCEL”, the unit switches to standby mode and nothing is reset. GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. 99 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround GLOSSARY Sound field programs Audio information ■ CINEMA DSP ■ ITU-R Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 100 ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. GLOSSARY Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 101 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 100 W • Video Signal Type ......................................................... PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 140 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω .......................................................135/170/200/245 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ...................................................... 150 W • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .................................................... 110 W • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................... 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video ................................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION* • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [General model] ....................... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ........................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................ 120 or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 76 dB/70 dB • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ..................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ...... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................ 0.06% or less • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ...................................................... 42 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) Phono (5 mV) to REC OUT [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................... 81 dB or more [Other models] ...................................................... 86 dB or more CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ............... 100 dB or more • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 530 to 1710 kHz [General model] ................................ 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................. 531 to 1611 kHz • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R .............................................................. 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shorted) to Front L/R ................. 60 dB/55 dB or more CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ........ 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ............................................... 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ......................................... 3.5 kHz • Phones Output ......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO ................................................................. 2.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................ 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT .............................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ....................................................................2 V/1.2 kΩ SUB WOOFER .......................................................... 4 V/1.7 kΩ ZONE 2 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada, Australia and Europe models] ................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ 102 • Frequency Response ........................ 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION* • Usable Sensitivity ........................................................... 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] .............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................ AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] ............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... 400 W/500 VA [Other models] .................................................................. 440 W • Standby Power Consumption .................................... 0.1 W or less • AC Outlets [U.K. and Australia models] ............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [U.S.A., Canada and China models]... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe and General models] ............... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 420 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 16-1/2”) • Weight ............................................................ 12.5 kg (27 lbs 9 oz) *Except Europe model 01EN_RX-V757_U-cv_version1.fm Page 1 Friday, December 24, 2004 4:29 PM U RX-V757 RX-V757 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WE59930